2007 Saturn RELAY Owner Manual M - Chevrolet · How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 14Safety Belts ............................................ 32Child Restraints ...................................... 56Airbag System ........................................ 83Restraint System Check ....................... 101

Features and Controls .............................. 103Keys ..................................................... 105Doors and Locks .................................. 114Windows ............................................... 130Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 133Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 138Mirrors .................................................. 153OnStar® System ................................... 154Universal Home Remote System .......... 156Storage Areas ...................................... 167

Instrument Panel ....................................... 177Instrument Panel Overview ................... 180Climate Controls ................................... 205

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicators .......................................... 219

Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 234Audio System(s) ................................... 270

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 357Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 358Towing ................................................. 396

Service and Appearance Care .................. 409Service ................................................. 412Fuel ...................................................... 414Checking Things Under

the Hood ........................................... 420Bulb Replacement ................................ 455Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 460Tires ..................................................... 462Appearance Care .................................. 501Vehicle Identification ............................. 510Electrical System .................................. 511Capacities and Specifications ................ 518

2007 Saturn RELAY Owner Manual M

1

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 519Maintenance Schedule .......................... 520

Customer Assistance Information ............. 537Customer Assistance and Information ... 538Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 552

Index .......................................................... 555

2

SATURN, SATURN Emblem, and the nameRELAY are registered trademarks of SaturnCorporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GM areregistered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may notbe equipped with all of them. For example,more than one entertainment system may beoffered or your vehicle may have been orderedwithout a front passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15869250 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Power Seats ............................................... 10Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 11Head Restraints .......................................... 13

Rear Seats .................................................... 14Rear Seat Operation ................................... 14Bucket Seats ............................................... 14Captain Chairs ............................................ 22Third Row Seat ........................................... 27

Safety Belts .................................................. 32Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 32Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 37How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 38Driver Position ............................................. 38Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 47

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 48Right Front Passenger Position ................... 48Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 49Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 52Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 55Safety Belt Extender ................................... 55

Child Restraints ............................................ 56Older Children ............................................. 56Infants and Young Children ......................... 59Child Restraint Systems .............................. 63Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 67Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 69Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 77Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 79

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 83Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 86When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 89What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 91How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 91What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 92Passenger Sensing System ......................... 93

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 99Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 100Restraint System Check ............................. 101

Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 101Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 102

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

Use the lever located onthe front of the seat toadjust the seatforward or rearward.Pull up on the lever tounlock the seat.Slide the seat to whereyou want it andrelease the lever.

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

To make sure the seat is locked into place, try tomove the seat back and forth with your body.

9

Power Seats

If the vehicle has powerseats, the controls usedto operate them arelocated on the outboardside of the seats.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have this feature. If it does, theheated seat buttons are located on the climatecontrol panel.

This feature will heat the lower cushions of thedriver’s and front passenger’s seats.

Press this button onceto turn the heated seaton to the high setting.

Driver’s Side Buttonshown, Passenger’s

Side similar

10

Both indicator lights next to the heated seatsymbol will be lit to indicate that it is on the highsetting. Press the button a second time to go to thelow setting. One indicator will be lit. Press thebutton a third time to turn the heated seat off.

This feature will turn off automatically whenthe ignition is turned off.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. Thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

11

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

12

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

13

The height of the head restraints can be adjustedon the first and second row seats. Pull thehead restraint up or push it down to adjust it.

The head restraints on the third row seat cannotbe adjusted.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationThe rear seats in your vehicle have levers andstraps used to adjust, remove, and reinstallthe seats. By using the levers and straps in thecorrect order, you can easily remove the seatsfrom the vehicle. If your vehicle has second rowcaptain chairs with airbags, the seats cannotbe removed.

When reinstalling the seats, make sure the seatsare in the proper positions.

If your vehicle has a second row center console, itcan be removed. See Second Row CenterConsole on page 171. Do not put a seat in thecenter position because the safety belt cannot beworn properly in this position. See Safety Belts:They Are for Everyone on page 32.

Bucket SeatsYour vehicle may have bucket seats in the secondrow. These seats can be adjusted severaldifferent ways.

Fold and Tumble Feature

{CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position whilethe second row is folded, or folded andtumbled, could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return the seatto the passenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

The second row bucket seats can be folded andtumbled forward. Use this feature for exiting andentering third row seats, if the vehicle has them.

1. Make sure the adjustable head restraints arein the fully lowered position.

14

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Fold the seatbackflat on the seat.

You can do this by either pulling on the nylonstrap, located on the rear right hand sideof the seat, or by lifting the recline lever,located on the front right hand side of theseatback.

3. Slide the seat all the way back in this position.

4. Release the rear setof seat hooks fromthe floor pins bypulling the nylonstrap, located at thebase of the seat. Usethe strap to guide theseat forward.

To return the seat to the original position, do thefollowing:

1. Align the seat so that the rear hooks on theseat are over the rear floor pins. Push downfirmly on the rear of the seat so that therear hooks attach to the rear floor pins.

2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is lockedto the floor.

15

3. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear righthand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,located on the front right hand side of theseatback, to raise the seatback to the uprightposition.

{CAUTION:


4. Push and pull on the seatback to check that itis locked.

Adjusting the Bucket Seats Forwardand RearwardThere are two adjustment levers on the secondrow bucket seats that enable them to moveforward or rearward.

One is located below the front of the seat.

16

The other lever islocated on the rearof the seat.

To adjust the second row bucket seats forward orrearward, do the following:

1. Lift up either lever and slide the seat forwardor rearward.

2. Release the lever when the seat is in thedesired position.

3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it islocked.

Folding or Reclining the SeatbacksThe seatback on a bucket seat can eitherbe folded forward or reclined using the nylon strapor the recline lever.

To fold the seatback forward, do the following:

1. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear righthand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,located on the front right hand side of theseatback to release the seatback.

Nylon Strap Recline Lever

17


2. Fold the seatback forward.

{CAUTION:


To raise the seatback to the upright position froma reclined position, do the following:

1. Pull the nylon strap or lift the recline leverwhile raising the seatback until it locks tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to check that itis locked.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Pull the nylon strap or lift the recline lever.

2. Press back on the seatback until it is inthe desired position

3. Let go of the strap or lever.

18

Removing the Bucket SeatsTo remove the bucket seats, do the following:

1. Make sure the head restraint is in thefully lowered position.


2. Fold the seatback flat on the seat, by eitherpulling on the nylon strap, located on the rearright hand side of the seat, or by lifting therecline lever, located on the front righthand side of the seatback.

3. Lift either one of the adjuster levers and slidethe seat to the most rearward position. See“Adjusting the Bucket Seats Forward andRearward” earlier in this section.

4. Release the rear set of hooks from the floorpins by pulling the nylon strap, located at thebase of the seat. Use the strap to guidethe seat forward.

19

5. To release the front seat hooks from the floorpins, squeeze the angled bar, located beneaththe seat toward the straight crossbar.

6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward,then toward the rear of the vehicle whilepulling it out. This should be done inone motion.

Installing the Bucket Seats

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After installing the seat,always check to be sure that the safetybelts are properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

Do not install the seat facing the rear of thevehicle, as it will not lock into place. If morestorage room is needed behind the seat, slide theseat forward.

Make sure the seat is in the full rear positionbefore beginning this procedure.

20

To install the bucket seats, do the following:

1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled barbeneath the seat toward the straight crossbar,while placing the front hooks of the seatinto the front two floor pins.

2. Make sure the seatis angled so that thefront seat hooksclear the floor pins.If the front hooksare not attachedcorrectly, the seat’srear hooks willnot attach to the rearset of floor pins.

If the front hooks are not attaching correctly,check that the seat is in the full rear position.

3. Firmly push the rear seat hooks into the rearfloor pins by pushing down the rear of the seat.

21

{CAUTION:

A seat that is not locked into placeproperly can move around in a collision orsudden stop. People in the vehicle couldbe injured. Be sure to lock the seat intoplace properly when installing it.

4. Check that the seat is locked by trying toraise the seat.

5. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear righthand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,located on the front right hand side of theseatback, to raise the seatback to the uprightposition.

{CAUTION:


6. Push and pull on the seatback to make surethat it is locked.

Captain ChairsYour vehicle may have second row captain chairs.If so, they can be adjusted forward or rearwardand the seatbacks can be adjusted.

22

Adjusting the Captain Chairs Forwardand RearwardThere are two manual adjustment bars on eachseat. One is located under the front of theseat cushion. The other one is located under therear of the seat cushion.

Lift up either bar to slide the seat forward orrearward. Release the lever. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked into place.

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

{CAUTION:


To recline the seatback, lift up on the reclinerlever located on the outboard side of the seat, thenmove the seatback to the desired position.

To raise the seatback, lift up on the recliner leverwithout applying pressure to the seatback.Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked in place.

23


To fold the seatback forward, lift up fully on therecliner lever. Push the seatback forward until itis flat.

The armrests can be lowered or raised for easierentry or exit of the vehicle. If your vehicle hascaptain chairs with side impact airbags, they willhave one armrest on the inboard side.

Removing a Captain Chair(without a Side Impact Airbag)If your vehicle has captain chairs with side impactairbags, the seats cannot be removed. SeeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 86 for moreinformation.

To remove a captain chair, do the following:

1. Pull the nylon strap behind the seat to releasethe rear hooks from the floor pins.

24

2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floorpins and removed from the vehicle.

Installing a Captain Chair(without a Side Impact Airbag)

{CAUTION:


Do not put the seats in so they face rearwardbecause they will not latch that way. For thesecond row, if you want more storage room behindthe seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.

Make sure the seatbacks are in the uprightposition, the seat belts are on the correct side ofthe seats and the seats are in the full rear positionbefore beginning this procedure.

25

To install a captain chair, do the following:

1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.

2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock therear latches onto the rear set of floor pins.

26

{CAUTION:


3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it isproperly attached.

Third Row SeatYour vehicle may have a third row seat. It is a fullbench seat and may come with hideaway rearstorage bins. See Hideaway Rear Storage Bins onpage 174 for more information. The third rowseat can be removed and replaced, or with theseatback folded, it will lie flat with the hideawayrear storage bins.

Folding the Seatback(s)


To fold down either side of the 50/50 splitbench seat, pull up on the lever located on theback of the seat you want to fold, and pushthe seatback down.

27

Returning the Seatback to an UprightPosition

{CAUTION:


To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Move the second row seat completely forwardby using the manual adjustment bar undereither the front or rear of the seat cushion.

2. Open the liftgate.

3. From the rear of the vehicle, locate thepullstrap attached to the lever on the back ofthe seat and pull it to raise the seat.

4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure that itis locked into the upright position.

28

Removing the Third Row Seat1. Remove the hideaway rear storage bins, if

equipped. See Hideaway Rear Storage Binson page 174 for more information.

2. Make sure all items are off the seat.


3. Put the seatback in its folded position beforeremoving the seat. See “Folding the Seatback”previously. 4. From behind the seat, squeeze the release

handle until the pin indicators are fully out.This indicates that the rear latches arereleased from the floor. For ease of removingthe seat, squeeze the handle with the palmof your hand up.

5. Lift the seat slightly from the floor to ensurethe latches are clear of the floor pins.

6. Pull the seat rearward and out of the vehicle.The release handle can be used to carrythe seat.

29

Installing the Third Row Seat

{CAUTION:


Do not put the third row seat in so it facesrearward because it will not latch that way. Theseat has to go in before the hideaway rear storagebins. See Hideaway Rear Storage Bins onpage 174 for more information.


For ease of installing the seat, put the seat in thefolded position before beginning this procedure.

1. From the rear of the vehicle, place thefront hooks of the seat onto the front floor pinsin the third row. To do this, the seat willneed to be angled approximately 8-10 inches(20–25 cm) from the floor so the fronthooks clear the rear floor pins and rear floorcups. Use the release handle to guide the seatinto place.If the front hooks are not attached correctly,the rear latches will not attach to the rear set offloor pins.

2. Firmly push the rear latches into the rear floorpins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.

30

{CAUTION:


3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it islocked down. The indicator pins will nolonger stick out when the seat is properlylatched into place.

{CAUTION:


4. Return the seatback to its upright position.See “Returning the Seatback to an UprightPosition” earlier in this section.

31

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

32

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 222 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 222.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

33

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

34

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

35

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

36

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will bein most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Everyairbag system ever offered for sale hasrequired the use of safety belts. Even if youare in a vehicle that has airbags, you still haveto buckle up to get the most protection. Thatis true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

37

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 56 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 59. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

38

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 55.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 47.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

39

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

40

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

41


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

42


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

43


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests.

44


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at alltimes.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

45


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourretailer to fix it.

46

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioningof the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt.

To move it down, pushdown on the button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You canmove the heightadjuster up by pushingup on the shoulderbelt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pushingthe button down to make sure it has locked intoposition.

47

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 38.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

48

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.

49

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 55.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

50

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

51

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each second row passengerposition. If your vehicle has a third row, there isone guide for each outboard position. Here is howto install a comfort guide to the shoulder belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.

52

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

53

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 49. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide into thestorage pocket.

54

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are located on the retractorpart of the safety belts. They help the safetybelts reduce a person’s forward movement in amoderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 102.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information, see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

55

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

56

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. If the child is sitting in a centerrear seat position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be surethat the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that beltsprovide. If the child is sitting in a rear outboardposition, see Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides on page 52.

57

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

58

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

59

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

60

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

61

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children with specialneeds.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

62

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

63

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

64

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

65

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 69 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

66

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

67

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) under certain conditions, no

CAUTION: (Continued)


system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

68

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments.

The following explains how to attach a childrestraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

69

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether always to beattached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether,and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have a top tether.Be sure to read and follow the instructions for yourchild restraint.If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

70

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

Each seating positionwith lower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease betweenthe seatback and theseat cushion, showingwhere the anchorsare located.

Second Row

Third Row

71

For the second row seating positions, the toptether anchors are located on the seatback, nearthe base of each seat. Be sure to use ananchor located on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraintwill be placed.

For the center third row position, if your vehiclehas one, the top tether anchor is located onthe seatback, near the center of the third rowseating position. This anchor can accommodateonly one top tether.

Second Row

Third Row

72

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position or in the third row outboardpositions, if your vehicle has one, if a nationalor local law requires that the top tether beattached, or if the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tether must beattached. There is no place to attach the top tetherin this position.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 67for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

73

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

74

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

75

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether around the headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise thehead restraint and routethe tether under thehead restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

76

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 69.

For vehicles with a third row, there are no toptether anchors in the outboard seating positions.Do not secure a child seat in these positionsif a national or local law requires that the top tetherbe anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

77

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

78

6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and theposition that you are using has a top tetheranchor, attach and tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 69.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a saferplace to secure a forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint on page 67.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sairbag and side impact airbag (if equipped) whenan infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 93 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 224 for more information onthis including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

79

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) under certain conditions, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. General Motorsrecommends that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 69.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 69 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

80

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 93. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag or airbags are off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s airbag orairbags, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN orSTART. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 224.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

81

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


82

8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicatoron the instrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your retailer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags.Side impact airbags are available for the driver, theright front passenger and the second rowcaptain’s chairs (if equipped).

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering onthe side of the seatback closest to the door.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce therisk of injury from the force of an inflatingfrontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job and comply with federalregulations.

83

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.



Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

84

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 56 or Infants and Young Children onpage 59.

85

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 223 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

86

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.

87

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for theright front passenger and/or the second rowcaptain’s chairs (if equipped), it is in the side ofthe seatback closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Do not let seatcovers block the inflation path of a sideimpact airbag.

88

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. Butthey are designed to inflate only if the impactexceeds a predetermined deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds take into account avariety of desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflateand help restrain the occupants. Whether yourfrontal airbags will or should deploy is not basedon how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impactand how quickly your vehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,these airbags inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front ofyour vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesnot move or deform, the threshold level forthe reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph(19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level fora full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph(29 to 40.2 km/h). The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that itcan be somewhat above or below this range.

89

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

The frontal airbags (driver and right frontpassenger) are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 83.Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers orrear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended todeploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity ofthe impact.

90

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, the airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules.Frontal airbag modules are located insidethe steering wheel and instrument panel. Forseating positions with side impact airbags, thereare also airbag modules in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

91

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, and forseating positions with side impact airbags, the sideof the seatback closest to the door — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on whenthe airbags inflate and turn on the hazard warningflashers. You can lock the doors, turn the interiorlamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers onby using the controls for those features.

92

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey inflate, you will need some new parts foryour airbag system. If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there to help protectyou in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts. Theservice manual for your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 547.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to RUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 224.

United States Canada

93

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags or the second rowside impact airbags (if equipped) are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seat andsafety belt. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s airbag or airbagsshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.


{CAUTION:



94


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) under certain conditions, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

95

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s airbag or airbags, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag or airbags are off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 79.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sairbag or airbags anytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag orairbags to be enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbagsare active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s airbag or airbags,depending upon the person’s seating posture andbody build. Everyone in your vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

96

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag or airbags.

97

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 223 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 100 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

98

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your retailer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 553.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned off and the battery isdisconnected, an airbag can still inflateduring improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of the airbag system. Besure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

99

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 538.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,the instrument panel, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system. Ifyou have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 538.

100

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 504.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, or an airbag covering (if equipped) on aseatback, the airbag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag module inthe steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, or both theairbag module and the seatback for seatingpositions with a side impact airbag(if equipped.) Do not open or break the airbagcoverings.

101

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 223.

102

Keys ............................................................ 105Remote Keyless Entry System .................. 106Remote Keyless Entry System

Operation ............................................... 107Doors and Locks ........................................ 114

Door Locks ................................................ 114Power Door Locks ..................................... 116Delayed Locking ........................................ 116Automatic Door Lock ................................. 117Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 118Lockout Protection ..................................... 118Dual Sliding Doors .................................... 118Power Sliding Door (PSD) ......................... 121Liftgate ...................................................... 128

Windows ...................................................... 130Power Windows ........................................ 131Manual Rear Quarter Windows .................. 131Power Rear Quarter Windows ................... 132Sun Visors ................................................ 132

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 133Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 133PASS-Key® III ........................................... 135PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 136

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 138New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 138Ignition Positions ....................................... 138Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 139Starting the Engine .................................... 140Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 141Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 143Parking Brake ........................................... 147Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 148Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 149Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 150Engine Exhaust ......................................... 151Running the Engine While Parked ............. 152

Section 2 Features and Controls

103

Mirrors ......................................................... 153Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 153Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 153Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 154Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 154

OnStar® System .......................................... 154Universal Home Remote System ................ 156

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 156

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 157

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 158

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED) ..... 163

Storage Areas ............................................. 167Glove Box ................................................. 167Cupholder(s) .............................................. 167Overhead Console (With Rail) ................... 168Overhead Console (Without Rail) ............... 170Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 170Folding Tray .............................................. 170Second Row Center Console .................... 171Luggage Carrier ........................................ 172Convenience Net (With Hideaway

Rear Storage Bins) ................................ 173Convenience Net (Without Hideaway

Rear Storage Bins) ................................ 173Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ..................... 174

Section 2 Features and Controls

104

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

105

This vehicle has a double sided key for theignition and the driver’s door lock.

Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theftsystem. The key has a transponder in the keyhead that matches a decoder in the vehicle’ssteering column. If a replacement key orany additional key is needed, you must purchasethis key from your retailer. The key will havePK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag thatcame with the original keys. Give this tag to yourretailer if you need a new key made.

Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmedbefore it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key®

III on page 135 for more information onprogramming your new key.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle,see Roadside Assistance Program on page 543for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemIf equipped, the keyless entry system operateson a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

106

At times you may notice a decrease in range.This is normal for any remote keyless entrysystem. If the transmitter does not work or if youhave to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacementis necessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 107.

• If you are still having trouble, see your retaileror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationYou can lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors andthe liftgate using the remote keyless entrytransmitter supplied with your vehicle.

The remote keylessentry transmitter shownhere is for a vehicleequipped with theremote vehicle startfeature and dual powersliding doors.

107

The remote keyless entry transmitter supplied withyour vehicle will only contain the buttons specificto your vehicle’s factory installed remotesystem features.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, you can start the engine from outsidethe vehicle. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at theend of this section for more detailed information.

Q (Lock): To lock all doors and the liftgate,press the lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See Power Door Locks on page 116for more details on the power door lock features.If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, the remote keyless entry transmitter’s lockbutton may arm the system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 133 for more details.

When you use the remote keyless entry transmitterto lock your vehicle, the turn signal lamps mayflash to let you know the command has beenreceived. If you press the lock button again, withinfive seconds, the horn will sound and the turnsignal lamps may flash to let you know the vehicleis already locked. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK”under DIC Vehicle Personalization (UplevelOnly) on page 261 for additional information.

" (Unlock): When you press unlock on theremote keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’sdoor will unlock. If you press unlock againwithin five seconds, all the doors and the liftgatewill unlock. If you would like all the doors to unlockthe first time you press unlock, see “FOBUNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261.

If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter will disarm the system. SeeContent Theft-Deterrent on page 133 for moredetails.

When you use your remote keyless entrytransmitter to unlock your vehicle the turn signallamps will flash to let you know the command wasreceived.

L (Remote Alarm): When you press the hornbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter, theturn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound.This will allow you to attract attention, if needed.

Press this button again to stop the alarm fromsounding.

108

Remote Power Sliding Door Operation

+ (Power Sliding Door): If your vehiclehas one power sliding door, the remote keylessentry transmitter will have a button with a vansymbol on it. Press and hold this button to open orclose the power sliding door. See Power SlidingDoor (PSD) on page 121.

*+ (Dual Power Sliding Doors): If yourvehicle has dual power sliding doors, your remotekeyless entry transmitter will have two buttonsthat have a van symbol on them. The van symbolon the left is for the driver’s side sliding doorand the van symbol on the right is for thepassenger’s side sliding door. Press and hold thepassenger’s or driver’s side button, with thevan symbol on it, to open or close the selectedpower sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)on page 121.

You can operate the power sliding door(s) withthe remote keyless entry transmitter even ifthe power sliding door override switch(es), on theoverhead console, are active or inactive. SeePower Sliding Door (PSD) on page 121 foradditional information.

If the sliding door is closed and the power slidingdoor button on the transmitter is pressed andheld, the vehicle’s doors will unlock and then thepower sliding door will open. If the powersliding door has been locked using the manualdoor lock lever, you will need to unlock the powersliding door before it can be opened with thekeyless entry transmitter sliding door button.

If your vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened,the driver’s side power sliding door will not opencompletely. Do not try to force the door. Oncethe fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side slidingdoor can be opened normally.

109

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourretailer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your retailer.When the retailer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourretailer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

See your retailer to match transmitters toanother vehicle.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutthree years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Static fromyour body transferred to these surfaces maydamage the transmitter.

1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into theslot on the side of the transmitter and twist itto separate the halves.

110

2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter.Do not use the metal flanges to pop out thebattery.

3. Replace the battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure thehalves are snapped together tightly so waterwill not get in.

5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonsfor seven seconds to synchronize thetransmitter.

6. Check the transmitter operation.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle. It may also turn the rearwindow defogger if the outside temperature isbelow 45°F (7°C).

Laws in some local communities may restrict theuse of remote starters. For example, somelaws may require a person using remote start tohave the vehicle in view when doing so. Checklocal regulations for any requirements on remotestarting of vehicles.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthe remote vehicle start feature, the remotekeyless entry transmitter will have a button withthis symbol on it.

An increased range of operation is provided withthe remote keyless entry transmitter that hasthe remote vehicle start button.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use theremote start feature. The vehicle may run out offuel. The vehicle may also run out of fuel ifthe vehicle is running for a long period of timewhen parked on an incline facing downward witha low fuel condition.

111

To start the engine using the remote start feature,do the following:1. Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter,

if equipped with the remote vehicle startbutton, at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe remote vehicle start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or for atleast two seconds, if the vehicle’s lights arenot visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.

3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on while theengine is running.

After a remote start, the engine will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to RUN.

The maximum number of remote starts or remotestart attempts between ignition cycles with thekey is two.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

After two remote starts have been provided, the vehicle’s ignition switch must be turned toRUN and then back to LOCK using the key beforethe remote start procedure can be used again.

If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,and the engine is running, insert the key into theignition switch and turn it to the RUN positionto drive the vehicle.

To manually shut off the engine after a remotestart, do any of the following:

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter atthe vehicle and press the remote startbutton until the parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switchand turn the switch to RUN and then backto LOCK.

112

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:

• The remote start system is disabled. See“REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors arenot closed.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• There is an emission control systemmalfunction.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenprovided. The maximum number of remotestarts or remote start attempts between ignitioncycles with the key is two.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your retailerto add the manufacturer’s remote vehiclestart feature.

If the keyless entry transmitter has a plus (+)symbol on the back cover, your vehicle hasthe remote start ready feature. You can lockor unlock your vehicle from approximately197 feet (60 m) away.

See your retailer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

113

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofa moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

114

From the outside, use your key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

To unlock the driver’s door from the outside withthe key, insert the key and turn it toward thefront of the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door fromthe outside with your key, insert the key andturn it toward the rear of the vehicle.

If your vehicle has power door locks, you may beable to unlock all of the doors and the liftgatewhen you insert the key, turn it toward the frontof the vehicle, and hold it there for one second.You may be able to lock all of the doors when youinsert the key and turn it toward the rear of thevehicle. From the inside, use the manual or power door

locks.

To unlock either front door from the inside, pullback on the manual lever. To lock either front doorfrom the inside, push the manual lever forward.

115

Power Door LocksYour vehicle has power door locks.

The switches arelocated on the driver’sand front passenger’sdoor. Press the topof the switch to unlockthe doors and liftgate.

With the content theft-deterrent system, thepower door lock switch will not unlock the doorsuntil the system is disarmed. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 133 for more details.

Press the bottom of the switch to lock the doorsand liftgate. With the content theft-deterrentsystem, the power door lock switch may cause thesystem to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 133 for more details.

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the locking of the vehicle to bedelayed until all doors have been closed forapproximately five seconds.

To activate the delayed locking feature, do one ofthe following:

• Press the driver’s door power lock switch onetime while the driver’s door is open.

• Press the passenger’s door power lock switchone time while the passenger’s door is open.

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter one time while any dooris open.

Two chimes will sound to signal that delayedlocking is active.

The doors may be locked immediately by repeatingany of the above actions more than one time.

116

If a door remains open, without any other doorbeing opened or closed, the vehicle will lock afterapproximately 45 seconds.

If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lockthe doors.

To turn the delayed locking feature off or on,see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 261.

Sliding Door Delayed LockingIf either sliding door is open when you use thepower door locks to lock the vehicle, the slidingdoor that is open will not lock. Normally thedelayed locking feature will be used to lock thesliding door after it has been closed.

The sliding door delayed locking feature will lockyour sliding door(s) in situations where the delayedlocking feature does not apply or was overriddenor programmed to be off. See “Delayed Locking”earlier in this section. Shortly after the lastsliding door is closed, all the doors will lock.

Automatic Door LockAll of the doors will lock automatically when youmove the shift lever out of PARK (P). This featurecannot be disabled.

If someone needs to get out of the vehicle whileit is not in PARK (P), shift into PARK (P), or,have that person use the manual lever orthe power door lock switch. When the door isclosed again, it will lock when the vehicle exceeds5 mph (8 km/h).

With automatic door locks, you can lock or unlockthe doors at any time, either manually or byusing the power door lock switches.

117

Programmable AutomaticDoor UnlockYour vehicle was programmed so that all doorswill unlock automatically when the shift leveris moved into PARK (P).

To change the way the automatic door unlockingoperates, see DIC Vehicle Personalization(Uplevel Only) on page 261.

Lockout ProtectionThe lockout protection feature makes it moredifficult to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’sdoor is open while the key is in the ignition, thedoor cannot be locked with the power doorlock switch.

This feature cannot guarantee that you will neverbe locked out of the vehicle. If the key is notleft in the ignition, or, if the manual door lock isused, the key could still be locked inside thevehicle. Always remember to take the keywith you.

Dual Sliding DoorsTo open either sliding door from outside thevehicle, pull the handle out and then pull the doortoward the rear. If you slide the door all theway back, the door will rest in a detent position.

To move the door forward, you must first pullthe door past the open detent position.

The driver’s side sliding door is designed to openonly a little if the fuel door is open. If this everhappens, do not try to force the sliding door. Justclose the driver’s side sliding door. Then whenthe fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side slidingdoor can be opened normally.

118

Sliding Door Lock{CAUTION:

If your vehicle is facing downward ona steep grade (15 percent or more),the door may not stay open and couldslam shut, possibly injuring someone.To make sure the door does not slamshut be sure to hold it open untileveryone is clear of the door, and onlythen allow it to slowly close.

119

Lock either sliding door from inside the vehicleby moving the manual lever down. Unlock itby moving the lever up.

With the power door locks, the sliding door lockhas a delay feature. See Delayed Locking onpage 116 and DIC Vehicle Personalization(Uplevel Only) on page 261.

Sliding Door Security LockYour vehicle is equipped with sliding door securitylocks that helps prevent young children or otherpassengers from opening the sliding door(s) usingthe inside door handle. To use one of theselocks, do the following:

1. Open the sliding door.2. On the inside of the

sliding door(s), onthe front edge of thedoor will be a lock.Push the lever up toengage the lock.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.

120

If your vehicle has power sliding door(s), you canprevent power opening of the sliding door fromthe passenger power sliding door (psd) activationswitch by pressing the psd second row passengeroverride (deactivation) switch located on theoverhead console. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)on page 121.

If you want to open the sliding door while thesecurity lock is on, unlock and open the door fromthe outside.

You should let adults and older children know howthe security lock works, and how to cancel the lock.If you do not, adults or older children who ride in therear will not be able to open the sliding door fromthe inside while the security lock feature is in use.

Canceling the Sliding DoorSecurity Lock1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door

from the outside.2. Push the security lock lever all the way down.3. Close the door.4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.

The sliding door lock will now work normally.

Power Sliding Door (PSD)If your vehicle has this feature, you can openand close the power sliding door(s) usingthe switches inside your vehicle. You can alsooperate the sliding door(s) with your remotekeyless entry transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry System on page 106.

{CAUTION:

Leaving your children or pets unattendedin your vehicle can be dangerous. Theycould operate the power sliding door.A child or others could be injured. Do notleave children or pets unattended in yourvehicle.

121

Power Sliding Door (PSD) SwitchesYour vehicle will have one of the followingswitch(es) located on the overhead consoleswitchbank.

If your vehicle has asingle power slidingdoor (PSD), youhave this switch.

If your vehicle has dualpower sliding doors, youhave these switches.

Your vehicle alsohas passenger powersliding door activationswitch(es).

PSD Activation/Override(Deactivation) Switch

Driver’s Side andPassenger’s Side PSD

Activation/Override(Deactivation) Switches

Passenger PSDActivation Switch

122

If you have a single PSD, this switch is located infront of the passenger side sliding door. If yourvehicle has dual PSDs, the switches are located infront of both sliding doors.

Power Sliding Door OperationThe power sliding door(s) will only open if thetransaxle is in PARK (P). The transaxle does nothave to be in PARK (P) to close the door(s).

There are several ways to open and close thepower sliding door(s).

• If your vehicle has a single power sliding door,press the top of the overhead console PSDactivation/override (deactivation) switch.

• If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors,press the top of the driver’s side and/orpassenger’s side overhead console PSDactivation/override (deactivation) switch.

• Press the passenger PSD activation switch.This switch will also stop a moving doorimmediately.

• Press the power sliding door button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

• To manually open the power sliding door(s)while the switch(es) are in the activationposition, pull and release the inside or outsidedoor handle to release the door latch. Thedoor will fully open.

• To manually close the power sliding door(s)while the switches are in the activationposition, pull the inside or outside door handleor the edge of the door. Move the doorabout 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closedposition and release it. The door will closecompletely and latch.

If a power sliding door is locked, it cannot beunlocked and opened using the overhead consolePSD switch(es) or the passenger PSD activationswitch(es). The power sliding door must eitherbe manually unlocked or unlocked using the powerdoor unlock switch located on the driver’s orfront passenger’s armrest, and then opened usingthe overhead or passenger PSD activationswitch(es).

123

The remote keyless entry transmitter can also beused to open the power sliding door(s). If thevehicle is locked, press the power slidingdoor button(s) and all doors will unlock and thesliding door(s) will open. See Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 107.

If the power sliding door has been manually locked,you must unlock the PSD before it can be opened.

Notice: If you leave the power sliding door onwhen you go through an automatic carwash, the door may accidentally open. Be surethe power sliding door is turned off whengoing through a car wash.

If the power sliding door(s) is open or in theprocess of closing when you shift out of PARK (P),a chime will sound. This is a warning that thesliding door(s) is not completely closed. Also, theDriver Information Center (DIC) will indicate ifthe door is open. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 241. Stop the vehicle andclose the door.

{CAUTION:

If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P)and accelerate before the power slidingdoor latches closed, the door may reverseto the open position. A child or otherscould fall out of the vehicle and beinjured. Always make sure the powersliding door is closed and latched beforeyou drive away.

124

If an object obstructs the power sliding door(s) whileit is closing, the door will automatically reverse tothe open position, provided it meets sufficientresistance. Resistance must be as strong as theforce of the closing door, or stronger. The force ofthe closing door increases significantly as the doorapproaches the latched position.

The driver’s side sliding door is designed to openonly a little if the fuel door is open. If this everhappens, do not try to force the sliding door. Whenthe fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s sidesliding door can be opened normally.

{CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught inthe path of the sliding door. Make sure thedoor path is clear before closing the door.

125

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle is facing downward on asteep grade (15 percent or more), the doormay not stay open and could slam shut,possibly injuring someone. To make surethe door does not slam shut, turn on thepower sliding door feature. Then if thedoor closes, it will close under the controlof the power door system.

Power Sliding Door Second RowPassenger Override (Deactivation)To help avoid accidental operation of the slidingdoor(s) by using the passenger PSD activationswitch, press the override (deactivation) part of theoverhead console switch. The door can still bemanually opened from the inside or outsidewith the override (deactivation) on.

To open a power sliding door(s) manually whenthe overhead console switch is in override(deactivation) position, pull the inside or outsidedoor handle and slide the door all the way back.

126

To close the door(s) manually when the overrideswitch(es) is in the override (deactivation) position,pull the inside or outside door handle and slidethe door all the way forward to the latched position.

To stop the door(s) immediately while thedoor(s) is opening or closing, press the PSDoverride (deactivation) part of the switch.

Pressing the PSD button(s) on the remote keylessentry will open and close the door unless thedoor has been manually locked using themechanical slider.

Resetting the Power Sliding DoorThe power sliding door may operate incorrectly ornot at all because of the following conditions:

• A low voltage or dead battery

• A disconnected battery

• If the instrument panel PSD/fuse 21,LHPSD/fuse 24 or RHPSD/fuse 25 areremoved or blown.

See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 512 formore information.

If any of these conditions occur, the power slidingdoor may need to be reset. If your vehicle hasthe dual power sliding doors, both doors will haveto be reset. To reset a door, do the following:

1. Check to be sure the power sliding door isunlocked and securely closed.

2. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

3. If the power sliding door overhead consoleswitch is in the override (deactivation)position, return to the activation position.

4. Open the sliding door using the remotekeyless entry transmitter, overhead consoleswitch, or passenger switch. Allow the door totravel fully open.

If the door does not travel to the fully openposition, press the overhead console switch to theoverride (deactivation) position and slide thedoor fully open and closed. Check for foreignobjects in the tracks. Repeat the procedure startingwith Step 1. If the door resists travel to the fullyopen position, see your retailer for service.

127

LiftgateTo unlock or lock the liftgate from the outside, usethe remote keyless entry transmitter. For moreinformation, see Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 107.

You can also use the power door lock switch tolock and unlock the liftgate.

Open the liftgate using the handle located abovethe license plate. Once slightly opened, theliftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of thevehicle will come on, illuminating the rearcargo area.

Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such as agarage door, you could break the liftgateglass. Always check to make sure the areaabove the liftgate is clear before opening it.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It cancause unconsciousness and even death.If you must drive with the liftgate open orif electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.


128


See Climate Control System onpage 205 or Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 209.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open themall the way. See Engine Exhauston page 151.

To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle,then firmly shut the liftgate. Do not drive with theliftgate open, even slightly.

129

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

130

Power Windows

The switches on thedriver’s door armrestcontrol the frontwindows when theignition is in RUN,ACCESSORY or whenRetained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP)on page 139.

The driver’s power window switch has two downpositions. The first position lowers the windownormally.

To raise the window, pull up the front of theswitch.

Express-Down WindowTo activate the express-down feature, push theAUTO switch all the way down to the secondposition, then release it. The window will lowercompletely. To stop the window from lowering allthe way, pull up on the front of the switch.

Manual Rear Quarter WindowsYour vehicle may have manual rear quarterwindows.

To open, pull the latchforward to release it,then swing the windowoutward. Press thecenter of the latch tosecure the windowin the open position.

To close, pull the center of the latch forward andthen close the latch. Press the center of thelatch to secure the window in the closed position.

131

Power Rear Quarter WindowsYour vehicle may have power rear quarterwindows.

This switch, located inthe overhead consoleswitchbank, is usedfor opening and closingthe power rearquarter windows.

Press the top of the switch to open the windows;both windows will open. The windows willcontinue to open as long as the switch is pressed,until they are fully opened.

Press the bottom of the switch to close bothwindows. The windows can be closed fully orpartially, depending on how long the switchis pressed.

The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, orRetained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active,to use the power rear quarter windows. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 139.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors.You can also remove them from the center mountand swing them to the side. The sun visors canalso slide along the rod to cover different areas ofthe front window.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have a visor vanity mirror. Pulldown the sun visor to access the vanity mirror.

Lighted Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have a lighted vanity mirror.Pull down the sun visor and flip up the cover toexpose the vanity mirror. The lamps will come onwhen you flip up the cover.

132

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

A light located on top of your instrument panel,near the center of the vehicle next to thewindshield, will flash slowly to let you know thatthe system has been armed.

While armed, the doors will not unlock with thepower door lock switch.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone triesto enter the vehicle without using the remotekeyless entry transmitter or a key, or turnsthe ignition to RUN. The horn will sound and theturn signal lamps will flash for up to two minutes.

133

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchYour alarm system will arm when the key isremoved from the ignition and you use the driver’spower door lock switch, with the driver’s dooropen or the passenger’s door power doorlock switch with the passenger’s door open to lockthe vehicle. If you would like to turn on powerdoor lock switch arming, see DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261.

When the security light flashes quickly the systemis arming. After all doors and the liftgate areclosed and locked, the security light will beginflashing at a very slow rate to let you knowthe system is armed.

Arming with the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitterYour alarm system will arm if the key is not in theignition and you use your remote keyless entrytransmitter to lock the doors. The security light willflash to let you know the system is arming. Ifyou press the transmitter’s lock button twice withinfive seconds, the horn will sound. After all doorsand the liftgate are closed and locked, the securitylight will begin flashing at a very slow rate to letyou know the system is armed.

Arming with Your KeyYour alarm system will arm when you use yourkey to lock the driver’s door. The security light willflash to let you know the system is arming.After all doors and the liftgate are closed andlocked, the security light will begin flashing at avery slow rate to let you know the system isarmed. If you would like your key not to arm thesystem, see DIC Vehicle Personalization(Uplevel Only) on page 261.

134

Arming ConfirmationIf remote unlock confirmation is on, the turnsignal lamps will flash briefly to let you knowwhen your alarm system has disarmed. Ifyou would not like the turn signal lamps to flash,see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 261.

Disarming with the Remote KeylessEntry TransmitterYour alarm system will disarm when you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to unlock thedoors. The security light will stop flashing to let youknow the system is no longer armed.

Disarming with Your KeyYour alarm system will disarm when you useyour key to unlock the driver’s door. The securitylight will stop flashing to let you know thesystem is no longer armed. If you would like yourkey not to disarm the alarm system, see DICVehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 261.

PASS-Key® IIIYour PASS-Key® III system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponderin the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

135

PASS-Key® III Operation

Your vehicle is equippedwith the PASS-Key® III(PersonalizedAutomotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® IIIis a passive theftdeterrent system.

This means you do not have to do anythingdifferent to arm or disarm the system. It workswhen you insert or remove the key from theignition.

When the PASS-Key® III system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it shuts downthe vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starterwill not work and fuel will stop being deliveredto the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electricalkey codes.

If the engine does not start and the securitymessage comes on, the key may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check theinstrument panel PASS KEY fuse. If the enginestill does not start with the other key, your vehicleneeds service. If your vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See your retailer ora locksmith who can service the PASS-Key® III tohave a new key made. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 512.

136

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoderto learn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. This procedure is forlearning additional keys only. If all the currentlyprogrammed keys are lost or do not operate, youmust see your retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III to have keys madeand programmed to the system.

See your retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III to get a new key blank that iscut exactly as the ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key, do the following:

1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmedkey into the ignition lock cylinder and start theengine. If the engine will not start, see yourretailer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn itto RUN within 10 seconds of removing theprevious key.

5. The security message will turn off once thekey has been programmed. It may not beapparent that the security message went ondue to how quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security messagecomes on and stays on, you will be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® IIIsystem, however, is not working properly and mustbe serviced by your retailer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the PASS-Key® III system at this time.

If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, seeyour retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III to have a new key made.

137

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform betterin the long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 398 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

Ignition PositionsThe key can be turned to one of four positionswhile in the ignition switch.

A (LOCK): This is the only position from whichyou can remove the key. This position locksyour ignition and transaxle.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If none of this works, then your vehicleneeds service.

138

B (ACCESSORY): This is the position in whichyou can operate the electrical accessories, suchas the radio.

C (RUN): This is the position to which the switchreturns after the engine is started and theignition key is released. This is the position fordriving. Even while the engine is not running,RUN can be used to operate your electricalaccessories and to display some instrumentpanel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the ignition key.The switch will return to RUN for driving.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside,as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves.If you leave the key in the ignition and park yourvehicle,a chime will sound, when you openthe driver’s door. Always remember to removeyour key from the ignition and take it with you.This will lock your ignition and transaxle.Also, always remember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle afterit has been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)With RAP, your power windows and the audiosystem will continue to work for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off or until eitherdoor is opened. If a door is opened, the powerwindows and audio system will shut off.

139

Starting the EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — that is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with thevehicle moving could damage the transaxle.Shift into PARK (P) only when your vehicleis stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal,turn your ignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of the key. The idlespeed will go down as your engine warmsup. Do not race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oil warms upand lubricates all moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects the electricalsystem. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released when theengine begins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking until the vehicle starts oruntil it exceeds the maximum crankingtime allowed, approximately 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventstarter-motor gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine is alreadyrunning. The engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or LOCK position.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage your starter motor.Wait about 15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining your battery or damagingyour starter.

140

2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds,push the accelerator pedal about one-quarterof the way down while you turn the key toSTART. Do this until the engine starts.As soon as it does, let go of the key.

3. If your engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START fora maximum of 15 seconds. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine. If the enginestill will not start, or starts briefly but thenstops again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending onthe temperature. When the engine starts,release the key and the accelerator pedal.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour Saturn retailer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is notrequired. Your vehicle may also have an internalthermostat in the plug end of the cord. Thiswill prevent operation of the engine coolant heaterwhen the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C)as noted on the cord.

141

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The electrical cord is located on thedriver’s side of the engine compartment.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourretailer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The retailer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

142

Automatic Transaxle Operation

Maximum engine speed is limited when you are inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect drivelinecomponents from improper operation.

There are several different positions for yourshift lever.

PARK (P): This gear position locks your frontwheels. It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before you can shiftfrom PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and psh the shift lever all the wayinfo PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.Then press the shift lever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P)on page 149.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 148. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 398.

143

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 390.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

144

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.The vehicle will shift down to the next gear andhave more power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 374

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in SECOND (2) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

Warm-Up ShiftYour vehicle has a computer controlled transaxledesigned to warm up the engine faster whenthe outside temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder.You may notice that the transaxle will shift ata higher vehicle speed until the engine is warmedup. This is a normal condition designed toprovide heat to the passenger compartment anddefrost the windows more quickly. See ClimateControl System on page 205 and Dual ClimateControl System on page 209 for more information.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. It reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You mightchoose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, when towinga trailer, so there is less shifting between gearsand when going down a steep hill.

145

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can helpcontrol your speed as you go down steep mountainroads, but then you would also want to use yourbrakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gearsas you go faster, something may be wrong witha transaxle system sensor. If you drive veryfar that way, your vehicle can be damaged.So, if this happens, have your vehicle servicedright away. Until then, you can use SECOND (2)when you are driving less than 35 mph(55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransaxle will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

146

Parking Brake

The parking brake islocated under theinstrument panel onthe driver’s side ofthe vehicle.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push down onthe parking brake pedal with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 226.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot whileyou push down on the parking brake pedal withyour left foot. When you lift your left foot from theparking brake pedal, it will pop up to thereleased position.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 398.

147

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 398.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake with your left foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pullingthe shift lever toward you and moving it up asfar as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and the parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

148

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called torque lock. To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and then shift intoPARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’sseat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)on page 148.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system which locks the shift lever inPARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCKposition. In addition, you must fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 143.

149

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

150

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

151

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 151.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place thiscan happen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER parkin a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 386.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 148.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 398.

152

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side. The day/nightadjustment can lessen glare from the headlampsbehind your vehicle. Pull the tab forward fordaytime use; push it back for night use.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls, locatedon the driver’s door,operate both outsiderearview mirrors.

Push the top control to the left or right to chooseeither the driver’s or passenger’s outsiderearview mirror. Leave the control in the centerposition to prevent moving the mirrors oncethey are adjusted.

Use the arrows on the bottom control to adjust theposition of each mirror. Adjust each mirror sothat you can see the side of your vehicle and thearea behind it, while sitting in a comfortabledriving position.

Both outside mirrors can be folded forward orrearward to prevent damage when going throughcar washes or confined spaces.

153

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes thingsappear farther away than they really are.

Outside Heated MirrorsIf equipped, the outside heated rearview mirrorsare activated when the rear window defoggeris turned on. See “Rear Window Defogger”in Climate Control System on page 205 orDual Climate Control System on page 209.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency where we can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

154

A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and theTerms and Conditions of the OnStar® SubscriptionService Agreement are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber Information packet locatedin your vehicle. For more information, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),or press the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, theSafe & Sound Plan is included for one yearfrom the date of purchase. You can extend thisplan beyond the first year, or upgrade to theDirections & Connections® Plan to meet yourneeds. For more information, press the OnStar®

button to speak with an advisor.

Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Directions & Connections® Plan• All Safe & Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®

subscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands at the touch of a button. Hands-FreeCalling is fully integrated into the vehicle, andmay be used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages orlinked to a cell phone through OnStar® SharedMinutes Plan. To find out more, refer to theOnStar® Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, orspeak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing theOnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

155

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorYour vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is afeature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that usesyour minutes to access weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing thephone button and giving a few simple voicecommands, you can browse through the varioustopics. Customize your information profile atwww.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls

$: Your vehicle may be equipped with aTalk/Mute button that can be used to interactwith OnStar®.

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 353for more information.

When calling into voice mail systems or to dialdirectory numbers, press this button once, wait forthe response, say the number(s) to be dialed,wait for the number(s) to be repeated and then say“dial.” See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.

156




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID numberis 2791021849A.

Changes or modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment.

157

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there are three roundLight Emitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions below. If there is one triangular LEDabove the Universal Home Remote Systembuttons, follow the instructions under UniversalHome Remote System Operation (with onetriangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of thesteps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

158

If you do not know if your garage door openeris a fixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

159

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

Example of Switch Settings Example

160

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would liketo use to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator lightabove the selected button should slowlyblink. You may need to hold the buttonfrom five to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosinga different function button in Step 7 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

161

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit.If you cannot locate the “learn” button, referto the owners guide for your garage dooropener.

3. Press and hold the button you would liketo use to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light,above the selected button, should slowlyblink. You may need to hold the buttonfrom five to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosinga different function button in Step 4 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

162

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttonsby repeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 542.

Universal HomeRemote System Operation(With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the “stopand reverse” feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

163

If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 538.

Be sure that people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

164

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage dooropener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usuallybe found where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release. Repeatthe press/hold/release sequence a secondtime, and depending on the brand of thegarage door opener, or other rolling codedevice, repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1, as this will erase allprevious programming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

165

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in thetrain (learning) mode and can be programmedat any time beginning with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote” shownearlier in this section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

166

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 538.

Storage AreasYour vehicle’s large carrying capacity can storemany items. If the vehicle has an extendedwheelbase, it can carry even larger items. Thefloor pins that are used to attach the seats,can be used to secure larger loads.

Glove BoxIf the glove box has a lock, put your key intothe lock and turn the key counterclockwise.To open the glove box, pull the latch release.

The glove box door has a detent to preventthe door from lowering too far. Open the glovebox until the door is partway open, then pullthe door down if you need it fully opened.

To close the glove box, the door must be pushedup past the detent. To lock the glove box, putyour key into the lock and turn the key clockwise.

Cupholder(s)There are cupholders located below the centerinstrument panel switchbank. The cupholdershave a rubber liner that can be removed, sothat larger cups can fit into the cupholders.You can also remove the liner to clean it.

To use the cupholders, pull the tray out. Pushthe tray back when not in use.

Your vehicle may be equipped with cupholdersin the second row.

167

Overhead Console (With Rail)If your vehicle is equipped with an overheadconsole, it may contain the following:

• Reading lamps. See Front Reading Lampson page 197 or Rear Reading Lampson page 197.

• Switchbank. See Overhead ConsoleSwitchbank on page 200.

• OnStar® System buttons. See OnStar®

System on page 154.

• Universal Home Remote buttons.See Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) on page 156or Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) on page 157.

See your retailer to purchase additional itemsfor the rail system.

Storage BinYour vehicle may have a storage bin located onthe overhead rail that you can use for storage.

If your bin is equipped with the finger size latchesdo the following:

1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in thedesired location.

2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supportingit with one hand.

3. Push in on the latch and then rotate it90 degrees.

168

4. Firmly press down making sure the latch isflat with the ribs (A) on the storage bin.

5. Switch hands and repeat Steps 2 through 4 forthe latch on the opposite side of the storage bin.

6. Reverse these steps in order to remove thestorage bin.

If your bin is equipped with the hand size latchesdo the following:1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in the

desired location.2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supporting

it with one hand.3. The bin will snap into place.

4. To remove the bin, support the bin withone hand while pulling each latch up and awayfrom the bin.

The contents of the bin should never weigh morethan 1.5 lbs (0.7 kg).

Always make sure to close and latch the binbefore driving.

169

Overhead Console (Without Rail)If your vehicle has an overhead console withoutthe rail system, it has two reading lights, acourtesy light, and a switchbank. See OverheadConsole Switchbank on page 200 for moreinformation.

Floor Console Storage AreaIf your vehicle has a storage compartment locatedon the front console below the front cupholders.Pull up and then forward on the handle to openthe storage compartment.

Folding Tray

Your vehicle may beequipped with foldingconvenience trayslocated between seats.To use each tray lift upon the handle locatedon its front end, whilepulling up on the tray tolock it into place. Thereare four cupholders oneach tray.

170

Second Row Center ConsoleIf your vehicle has the second row center console,use the following procedure to remove or installthe console.

Removing the Center Console1. Locate the attachment lever in an opening

on the rear of the console

2. Pull the attachment lever upward to releasethe attachment hook.

3. Lift the console up to remove it from thevehicle.

Replacing the Center Console

{CAUTION:

A second row center console that isnot locked into place properly can movearound in a crash or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could be injured.Be sure to lock the console into placeproperly when installing it.

1. Position the second row center console abovethe forward floor attachments between thesecond row bucket seats.For information on installing the seats, seeRear Seat Operation on page 14.

2. Place the console’s front hooks onto theforward floor attachments.

3. Locate the attachment lever at the rear of theconsole and pull up.

4. Rock the rear attachment bracket onto thefloor attachment and release the lever.

5. Pull up on the console to ensure the rearattachment hook is latched.

171

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

If you have the luggage carrier, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are notstandard on this vehicle and must be purchasedat your retailer.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo sothat it rests on the slats as far forwardas possible and against the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 391.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as youare driving, check now and then to make surethe cargo is still securely fastened.

172

Convenience Net (With HideawayRear Storage Bins)Your vehicle may have a convenience net.The convenience net is designed to help keepsmall loads, from falling out of the vehiclewhen the liftgate is opened. Install the conveniencenet at the rear of your vehicle, inside the liftgate.

To use the convenience net, do the following:

1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on bothsides of the liftgate opening. The label on thenet should be in the upper left corner.

2. Attach the lower loops to the tabs at the rearedge of the rear hideaway rear storage bins.

When not in use, it is recommended that you takedown the convenience net to extend the life ofthe net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keepthe rear exit clear.

Convenience Net (Without HideawayRear Storage Bins)Your vehicle may have a convenience net.The convenience net is designed to help keepsmall loads, like grocery bags, from fallingover. Install the convenience net at the rear ofyour vehicle, inside the liftgate.

To use the convenience net, do the following:

1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on bothsides of the liftgate opening. The label onthe net should be in the upper left corner.

2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal ringson the floor.

3. Once you have loaded items into the net,stretch the higher side of the net up and overthe top of the load to hold it firmly in place.

The convenience net has a maximum capacity of100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger,heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor of yourvehicle, as far forward as you can.When not in use, it is recommended that you takedown the convenience net to extend the life of thenet and to help retain its elasticity, and to keepthe rear exit clear.

173

Hideaway Rear Storage Bins

{CAUTION:

If any removable convenience item isnot secured properly, it can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop. People inthe vehicle could be injured. Be sure tosecure any such item properly.

Your vehicle may have hideaway rear storagebins. It provides extra storage space for the rearof the vehicle.

To open the hideaway rear storage bins, pull upon the door latch located on the front of the cover.The hideaway rear storage bins cover hastwo automatic prop rods to hold it up and in place.

To close the cover, you must pull one of theprop rod linkages toward you while holding ontothe door latch and lower the cover to close it.

Removing the Hideaway RearStorage Bins1. Make sure that all items are off the hideaway

rear storage bins and that they are empty.

2. Turn the hand knob, located at the rear of thehideaway rear storage bins, counterclockwiseuntil the knob is loose.

3. Lift up on the hand knob, then grip and pullup on the hideaway rear storage bins toremove them from the vehicle.

174

Replacing the Hideaway RearStorage Bins1. Make sure the third row seat is properly

installed in the vehicle. See Third Row Seaton page 27 for more information. If thethird row seat is not in the vehicle with thehideaway rear storage bins, the hideawayrear storage bins will not be locked intothe correct position in the vehicle.

2. Make sure that the hideaway rear storagebins are empty and closed.

3. Lift the hideaway rear storage bins up andinto the rear of the vehicle.

4. Slide the hideaway rear storage bins in andalign it to the rear seat.

5. Press down on the front of the hideaway rearstorage bins so the center is aligned on thesill mounting bracket.

6. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight.

7. Pull up on the hideaway rear storage binsto make sure they are locked into place.

The cover of the hideaway rear storage bins canbe left in its upright position while the vehicleis moving.

The hideaway rear storage bins and the third rowseat both have a maximum weight capacity of400 lbs (181.6 kg).

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

175

✍ NOTES

176

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 180Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 182Other Warning Devices ............................. 182Horn .......................................................... 182Tilt Wheel .................................................. 182Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 183Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 184Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 185Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 185Windshield Wipers ..................................... 185Windshield Washer .................................... 186Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 187Cruise Control ........................................... 188Exterior Lamps .......................................... 192Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 193Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 193Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .................. 193Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 195Interior Lamps Control ............................... 195Dome Lamp .............................................. 196Entry Lighting ............................................ 196Delayed Lighting ........................................ 196Exit Lighting .............................................. 197Front Reading Lamps ................................ 197

Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 197Cargo Lamp .............................................. 198Electric Power Management ...................... 198Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 199Overhead Console Switchbank .................. 200Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 200Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 203Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current .... 204Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 205

Climate Controls ......................................... 205Climate Control System ............................. 205Dual Climate Control System ..................... 209Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 212Rear Climate Control System

(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 212Rear Climate Control System

(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 215Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 217

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 219Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 220Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 221Trip Odometer ........................................... 221Tachometer ............................................... 221Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 222

Section 3 Instrument Panel

177

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 222Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 223Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 224Charging System Light .............................. 226Brake System Warning Light ..................... 226Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 227Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 228Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 228Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 229Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 232Security Light ............................................ 232Cruise Control Light .................................. 233Highbeam On Light ................................... 233Fuel Gage ................................................. 233Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 234

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 234DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 235DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..................... 240DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 241DIC Vehicle Personalization

(Uplevel Only) ........................................ 261

Audio System(s) ......................................... 270Setting the Time ........................................ 272Radio with CD ........................................... 272Using an MP3 ........................................... 287XM Radio Messages ................................. 293Navigation/Radio System ........................... 294Rear Seat Entertainment System

(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 294Rear Seat Entertainment System

(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 309Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 325Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 328Mobile Digital Media System ..................... 330Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 352Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 353Radio Reception ........................................ 354Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 355Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 355Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 355XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 356Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 356

Section 3 Instrument Panel

178

✍ NOTES

179

Instrument Panel Overview

180

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 212.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 183.

C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 353.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 220.

E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls (IfEquipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 234.

F. Traction Control System Button (If Equipped).See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 365.

G. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 182.

H. Passenger Airbag Status And PassengerSeatbelt Reminder Indicator. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 224 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 222.

I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 270.

J. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 192.

K. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior LampsControl on page 195. Instrument PanelBrightness Control. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 195.

L. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 421.

M. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake onpage 147.

N. Horn. See Horn on page 182.O. Cruise Controls (If Equipped). See Cruise

Control on page 188.P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System

on page 205. Dual Climate Controls. SeeDual Climate Control System on page 209.

Q. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped). SeeHeated Seats on page 10.

R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 167.

181

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise the steeringwheel to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

182

To tilt the wheel, holdthe wheel and pull thelever. Then movethe wheel to acomfortable position andrelease the lever tolock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 184.

• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 185.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 185.

• N Windshield Wipers. See WindshieldWipers on page 185.

183

• L Windshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 186.

• Z Rear Window Wiper. See WindshieldWasher on page 186.

• = Rear Window Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 186.

For information on the headlamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 192.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in the directionof the turn or lanechange.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowflashes faster than normal, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers will not see yourturn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andcheck the fuse. See Bulb Replacement onpage 455 and Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 512.

If you have a trailer towing option with addedwiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator willflash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulbis burned out. Check the front and rear turn signallamps regularly to make sure they are working.

184

Turn Signal On ChimeIf either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driverknow to turn it off. If you need to leave the signalon for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off thesignal and then turn it back on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction leveraway from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light willappear on theinstrument panel cluster.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you.

Flash-to-PassWhen the headlamps are off, pull the lever towardyou to momentarily turn on the high beams.This will signal that you are going to pass. Whenyou release the lever, they will turn off.

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn theband to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start.Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.If you want more wipes, hold the band on mistlonger.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for along or short delay between wipes. This canbe very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the bandto choose the delay time. The closer to the topof the lever, the shorter the delay.

185

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid band past the delay settings. Forhigh-speed wiping, turn the band further, to thesecond solid band past the delay settings. To stopthe wipers, move the band to off.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Ifyour blades do become worn or damaged, getnew blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

LQ (Windshield Washer): Press and hold thewindshield washer paddle with this symbol on itto wash your windshield. The washers and wiperswill operate.

When you release the paddle, the washers willstop, and the wipers will continue to operatefor two cycles, unless your wipers had alreadybeen on. In that case, the wipers will resume thewiper speed you had selected earlier.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

186

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

If your vehicle has therear window washer/wiper, the controls arelocated on the end of theturn signal/multifunctionlever.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe rear washers/wipers off.

Z (Rear Wiper): Move the lever to this positionto turn the rear wipers on.

= (Rear Washer/Wiper): Move the lever to thisposition to wash and wipe the rear window.

The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottleas the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid beforethe windshield washer. If you can wash yourwindshield but not your rear window, check thefluid level.

187

Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle hascruise control, the leveris located below thewindshield wiper controlon the right side ofthe steering wheel.

Q RES + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the leverup to resume the cruise control speed, or toaccelerate when passing another vehicle.

J (CRUISE CONTROL) ON/OFF q: Press thebutton on the end of the lever to turn the cruisecontrol on. Press it again to turn cruise control off.

R SET — (Set/Coast/Decelerate): Push thelever down to set the cruise speed. If the cruisespeed is already set this position can be usedto coast or decelerate from a higher speed.

CANCEL R: Pull the lever to cancel the cruisecontrol speed.

188

Cruise control allows a speed of approximately25 mph (40 km/h) or more to be maintainedwithout keeping your foot on the accelerator. Thisis helpful on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 365. When road conditions allow, thecruise control can be used again.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Push the button at the end of the cruisecontrol lever to turn the cruise control on.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

3. Push down on the cruise control lever andrelease it. This will set the speed in cruisecontrol.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

This symbol will appearon the instrument panelcluster when thecruise control is set.

This symbol will disappear when the brakes areapplied or the cruise control is cancelled. It willreappear when the set cruise speed is resumed.

189

Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is set at a desired speed andthen the brakes are applied, the cruise control shutsoff. But the cruise control does not need to be reset.

Once the vehicle is traveling approximately25 mph (40 km/h) or more, the cruise controllever can be pushed upward toward the plus(resume/accelerate) position to return to the presetcruise speed.

The vehicle will return to and stay at the presetcruise speed. If the cruise control lever is pushedup and held toward the plus (resume/accelerate)position, the vehicle speed will increase untilthe lever is released or the brakes are applied.Do not continue to hold the lever in the plus(resume/accelerate) position, unless a faster speedis desired.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Push up on the cruise control levertoward the plus (resume/accelerate) position,then release the lever and take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will nowcruise at the higher speed.

• Push up and hold the cruise control levertoward the plus (resume/accelerate) positionuntil the vehicle reaches the desired speed.Then release the cruise control lever. Toincrease the vehicle’s speed in very smallamounts, push up briefly on the cruise controllever and release it. Each time this is done,the vehicle will speed up approximatelyone mph (1.6 km/h).

The acceleration feature will only work after thecruise control speed has been set by pushing thecruise control lever down to the set position.

190

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speedwhile using cruise control:

• Push the cruise control lever downwardtoward the minus (set/coast/decelerate)position until a lower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push thecruise control lever downward toward theminus (set/coast/decelerate) position briefly.Each time this is done, the vehicle willslow down approximately one mph (1.6 km/h).

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, andthe steepness of the hills. When going upsteep hills, the accelerator pedal might have to beused in order to maintain the vehicle’s speed.When going downhill, the brakes might have to beapplied, or the transaxle might have to beshifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speeddown. Doing either of these things will take thevehicle out of cruise. It may be better not touse the cruise control if the brakes constantly haveto be applied, or the vehicle continuously needsto be shifted to a lower gear.

Cancelling Cruise ControlTo cancel a cruise control session, pull the cruisecontrol lever forward, or step lightly on thebrake pedal.

Doing either of these things will only end thecurrent cruise control session, but the set speedwill be retained in memory.

Push the button at the end of the cruise controllever to turn the system off.

191

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen the cruise control or the ignition is turnedoff, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The control to the left ofthe steering columnoperates the exteriorlamps.

9 (Off): Turn the control to this position totoggle off all lamps. This is a momentary controlthat will spring back to AUTO when released.

This momentary control will turn the automaticheadlamps and/or the Daytime Running Lamps onand off for U.S. vehicles. For vehicles first soldin Canada, this is only true when the transaxle is inPARK (P).

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to set your headlamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode, if enabled, will turn the exteriorlamps on and off automatically depending on howmuch light is available outside the vehicle.

Due to the momentary switch design, yourautomatic lights may be disabled even if thecontrol is in the AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Taillamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

192

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature, if equipped, will automaticallyactivate the headlamps and parking lamps afterthe windshield wipers have been in use forabout 30 seconds and when all of the followingconditions are met.

• The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.

• The headlamps have not already beenactivated by automatic lighting.

• The automatic lighting feature has not beendisabled using the exterior lamp control.

See Exterior Lamps on page 192 for additionalinformation.

If the wipers are activated for over 30 secondsand the exterior lamp control is in the parkinglamps position, or the automatic lighting featurehas been disabled using the exterior lamp control,a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message willappear on the Driver Information Center, ifequipped.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you turn the ignition to LOCK while leaving thelamps on, you will hear a warning chime oncethe driver’s door is opened.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional Daytime Running Lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

193

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.The DRL system will make front parking andturn signal lamps come on in daylight when thefollowing conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is off.

When the DRL are on, only your front turn signallamps will be on. Your instrument panel willnot be lit up.

When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lampswill come on automatically. When it is brightenough outside, the exterior lamps will turn off andthe DRL will turn on. Of course, you may stillturn on the headlamps any time you need to.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it willtake approximately 30 seconds for the automaticheadlamp system to change to DRL if it islight outside. During that delay, your instrumentpanel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Makesure your instrument panel brightness control isin the full bright position. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 195.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automaticheadlamps off, toggle the exterior lamp controlto off after starting the vehicle.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

194

Instrument Panel Brightness

The knob to adjust theinstrument panelbrightness is located inthe center of theinterior lamp controls.

Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights andcounterclockwise to dim them.

Interior Lamps Control

The interior lamp controlis located to the right ofthe exterior lampcontrols on theinstrument panel to theleft of the steeringcolumn.

R (Interior Lamp Override): Turn the outerknob to this position to have your interior lampsremain off while any door is open.

1 (Door): Turn the outer knob to this position toturn the interior lamps on while any door isopen and when the ignition key is removed fromthe ignition.

+ (Interior Lamps): Turn the outer knob tothis position to turn the interior lamps on.

Turn the inner knob to adjust the instrument panelbrightness, described earlier in this section.

195

Dome LampThe dome lamp is located in the headliner and hastwo buttons to manually turn it on or off. The domelamp will come on each time you open a door,unless you turn on the interior lamps overridefeature. See Interior Lamps Control on page 195.

Entry LightingWith entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle isilluminated so that you can see inside beforeyou enter your vehicle. The lamps will come on for20 seconds if you unlock your door using yourkey or the remote keyless entry transmitter and theignition is in LOCK. After 20 seconds havepassed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. Thelamps will turn off before the 20 seconds if youdo one of the following:

• Lock all the doors using the key.

• Press lock on the power door lock switch.

• Press lock on the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

When any door is opened, entry lighting iscancelled. The interior lamps will stay on whileany door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade outwhen all doors and the liftgate are closed.

The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 secondsafter all doors have been closed if they have notbeen locked. See Delayed Lighting on page 196.To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, seeDIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 261.

Delayed LightingThe delayed lighting feature will continue toilluminate the interior for 20 seconds after all doorshave been closed, so that you can find yourignition and buckle your safety belt at night.Delayed lighting will not occur while the ignition isin RUN or ACCESSORY. After 20 secondshave passed, the interior lamps will slowly fadeout. The lamps will fade out before the 20 secondshave passed if you do one of the following:

• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

• Lock all doors using the power door lockswitch or the key.

To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, seeDIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 261.

196

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will come onfor about 25 seconds whenever you removethe key from the ignition. If you turn the ignitionkey to RUN or ACCESSORY, the lamps will fadeout. The lamps will also fade out if you lock thedoors with the power door lock switch or theremote keyless entry transmitter.

When any door is opened, exit lighting iscancelled. The interior lamps will stay on whileany door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade outwhen all doors and the liftgate are closed.

The interior lamps may stay on for up to20 seconds after all doors have been closed ifthey have not been locked. See Delayed Lightingon page 196.

To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see DICVehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 261.

Front Reading LampsThere are two reading lamps and one courtesylamp in the overhead console. To turn eitherreading lamp on or off, press the lens of the lamp.The courtesy lamp will come on each time youopen a door, unless you turn on the interior lampsoverride feature. See Interior Lamps Control onpage 195.

Rear Reading LampsThere are two reading lamps in the third rowheadliner. To turn either reading lamp on or off,press the lens of the lamp.

There may also be a reading lamp in the secondrow, integrated with the dome lamp. To turnthe second row reading lamp on or off, press thebutton next to the lamp lens.

197

Cargo LampThe cargo lamp is located in the rear of yourvehicle, above the liftgate opening, and does nothave a switch. The cargo lamp will come oneach time you open a door, unless you turn on theinterior lamps override. See Interior LampsControl on page 195.

Electric Power ManagementThis vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM), an advanced control system. It estimatesthe battery’s temperature and state of chargeand then adjusts the voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you maysee the voltage move up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

198

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or BatteryVoltage Low. If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a feature to help prevent youfrom draining the battery, in case you accidentallyleave the interior lamps on. If you leave anyinterior lamps on while the ignition is in lock or off,they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.The lamps will not come back on again untilyou do one of the following:

• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY

• Open a closed door, or close and reopena door.

• Turn the interior lamps on if they are in thedoor or override position.

• Turn the interior lamps to the door or overrideposition and then to on again if the interiorlamp control is in the on position.

If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) onthe odometer, the battery saver will turn offthe lamps after only three minutes.

199

Overhead Console Switchbank

The overhead console switchbank is located in theoverhead console. This switchbank may includethe following:

• Power Sliding Door(s)/Override Switch(es).See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 121.

• Power Rear Quarter Windows. See PowerRear Quarter Windows on page 132.

• Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)Disable Switch. See Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) on page 200.

If your vehicle does not have some of theseoptions, there will be a blank.

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)If your vehicle is equipped with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system, it is designedto help you park, while the vehicle is inREVERSE (R). It operates only at very lowspeeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can helpmake parking easier and to help you avoidcolliding with objects such as parked vehicles. TheURPA system can detect objects up to 5 feet(1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how closethese objects are from your rear bumper.

Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehiclespeed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonicsensors located at the rear bumper are used todetect the distance to the object. The URPAdisplay is located inside the vehicle, near the rearwindow. It has three color-coded lights used toprovide distance and system information tothe driver.

200

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of 3 mph(5 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 5 feet(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. Thisdistance may be less during warmeror humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

URPA can be turned offby pressing the rearpark aid disable switchlocated in theoverhead consoleswitchbank.

While the system is disabled, an indicator light willbe lit on the switch. You will not see any lightson the rear display if the switch is in the offposition.

201

How the System WorksUnless disabled, the URPA will turn onautomatically when the shift lever is moved intoREVERSE (R). When the system turns on,the three lights on the display will illuminate forone and a half seconds to let you know thatthe system is working. If your vehicle is moving inREVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph(5 km/h), the red light will flash to remind you thatthe system does not work at speed greaterthan 3 mph (5 km/h).

If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedof less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the followingwill occur:

Description English Metricamber light 5 ft 1.5 m

amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mamber/amber/red lights &

continuous chime 20 in 0.5 m

amber/amber/red lightsflashing & continuous

chime1 ft 0.3 m

A chime will sound the first time an object isdetected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet(1.5 m) away.

URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgatelevel. In order for the rear sensors to recognizean object, it must be within detection range behindthe vehicle.

When the System Does Not Seem to WorkProperlyThe light may flash red when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not keptclean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free ofmud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions thatmay affect system performance include things likethe vibrations from a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a very large truck. Ifafter cleaning the rear bumper and then drivingforward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the displaycontinues to flash red, see your retailer.

If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was on the back of, or hangingout of your liftgate during your last drive cycle,the light may also flash red. The light will continueto flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until yourvehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)without any obstructions behind the vehicle.

For cleaning instructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 505.

202

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle is equipped with a front accessorypower outlet located near the floor on theinstrument panel. It can be used to plug inelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephoneor CB radio.

Pull the cover down to use the accessory poweroutlet. When not in use, keep the cover on.

The rear accessory power outlet is located behindthe third row seats on the driver’s side behindan access cover.

To remove the cover, pull the tab on the coverand pull it off. To put the cover back on, line up thetabs at the back of the cover and put the coverin place. Push down the tab to secure the cover.When not in use, always cover the rearaccessory power outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended periods will drain the battery.Always turn off electrical equipment when notin use and do not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperage rating of20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem see your retailer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

203

Power Outlet 115 Volt AlternatingCurrentYour vehicle may have a power outlet that can beused to plug in auxiliary electrical equipmentwith a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try touse equipment that requires more than the limit, aprotection circuit will cut the power supply. Toreset the outlet, unplug the item and plug it backin or turn the ignition to LOCK or ACCESSORYand then back on. The power will automaticallyrestart when equipment that operates withinthe limit is plugged in.

The power outlet islocated behind thethird row seats onthe passenger’s siderear quarter trim panel.

The power outlet is not designed for the followingelectrical equipment and may not work properlyif these items are plugged into the power outlet:

• Equipment with high initial peak wattagesuch as: compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

• Other equipment requiring an extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlled electric blankets,touch sensor lamps, etc.

204

Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To usethe lighter, located on the instrument panelbelow the climate controls, push it in all the wayand let go. When it is ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

205

OperationTurn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the airto the instrument panel outlets, then directsthe remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets and warmer air tothe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets. Use this mode to send air tothe rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under thefront seats free of objects that could obstructairflow to the rear of the vehicle.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

Outside Air: This mode will be automaticallyselected when your vehicle is in any mode exceptmaximum air conditioning.

A (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.The fan must be turned on for the air conditioningcompressor to operate.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the air temperature inside yourvehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air-conditioning system on or off. When itis pressed, an indicator light in the button will comeon to let you know that air conditioning isactivated.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

206

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning):Turn the right knob to this position for maximum airconditioning. This will select air conditioning andrecirculation for maximum cooling of yourvehicle. This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air fromcoming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle orhelp heat or cool the air inside your vehiclemore quickly. This mode will automatically beselected when you select maximum airconditioning.

( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn onthe heated seats. The button on the left controlsthe driver’s seat and the button on the rightcontrols the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seatson page 10 for additional information.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity, or moisture, condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air to thewindshield and the floor outlets. When you selectthis mode, the system runs the air-conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is at orbelow freezing. The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode.

207

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the airto the windshield and the side window outlets,with some air directed to the floor outlets. In thismode, the system will automatically run theair-conditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing. Recirculationcannot be selected while in the defrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerIf your vehicle has a rear window defogger awarming grid is used to remove fog from therear window.

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light in thebutton will come on to let you know that therear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will turn off about10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned onagain, the defogger will only run for aboutfive minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button againor by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

208

Dual Climate Control SystemYour vehicle may have a dual climate controlsystem. With this system you can controlthe heating, cooling, and ventilation for yourvehicle.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.The fan must be turned on for the air conditioningcompressor to operate.

Temperature Control: Use the driver’s andpassenger’s levers to increase or decrease the airtemperature inside your vehicle.

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning):Turn the right knob to this position for maximum airconditioning. This will select air conditioning andrecirculation for maximum cooling of your vehicle.

Recirculation: This mode keeps outside airfrom coming in the vehicle. It can be usedto prevent outside air and odors from enteringyour vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly. This mode will automaticallybe selected when maximum air conditioning isselected.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

209

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, then directs theremaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler airis directed to the upper outlets and warmer air tothe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets. Use this mode to send air tothe rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under thefront seats free of objects that could obstructairflow to the rear of the vehicle.

Outside Air: This mode is automatically selectedwhen your vehicle is in any mode exceptmaximum air conditioning.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. When itis pressed, an indicator light in the button will comeon to let you know that air conditioning isactivated.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them and switch tomaximum air conditioning mode. This helps toreduce the time it takes for your vehicle tocool down. It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn onthe heated seats. The button on the left controlsthe driver’s seat and the button on the rightcontrols the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seatson page 10 for additional information.

210

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity, or moisture, condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air to thewindshield and the floor outlets. When this modeis selected, the system runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is at orbelow freezing.

The recirculation mode cannot be selected whilein the defog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets, withsome air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,the system will automatically run the airconditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing.

Recirculation cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. Anindicator light in the button will come on to let youknow that the rear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will turn off about10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned onagain, the defogger will only run for aboutfive minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button againor by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

211

Outlet Adjustment

k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this positionto open the air outlets.

l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this positionto close the air outlets.

Use the louvers located on the air outlets tochange the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

Rear Climate Control System(Option A, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have a rear climate controlsystem that allows the driver to adjust thefan speed for the rear seating area. This systemworks with the main climate control system in yourvehicle.

This lever is located below the main climatecontrol system on the instrument panel. Use thislever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seatpassengers.

212

A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increaseor decrease airflow to the rear seating area.Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.

AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rearpassengers to adjust the temperature and airflowto the rear seating area.

Your vehicle may also have a rear climate controlsystem that allows the rear passengers toadjust the temperature and fan speed for the rearseating area.

When the front climate control is in AUX and therear climate control fan or temperature buttonis pressed, the display will show the same airflowmodes as the front climate control system. SeeDual Climate Control System on page 209 The front control must be in AUX position to

enable adjustment of the temperature and fanspeed on the rear control system. If it is notin AUX, pressing the fan or temperature button onthe rear climate control will show a DISABLEDmessage on the rear seat entertainment systemdisplay.

tr (Decrease Setting): Press this button todecrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in the display.

213

[u (Increase Setting): Press this button toincrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in display.

9 (Fan): Press this button to increase ordecrease fan speed. After pressing this button,arrows and a fan will appear in the display.The arrows indicate that to increase or decreasefan speed, you need to press either the left or rightarrow button. The displayed arrows and fan willdisappear after a few seconds.

b (Temperature): Press this button to increaseor decrease temperature. After pressing thisbutton, arrows and a temperature scale will appearin the display. The arrows indicate that toincrease or decrease temperature, you need topress either the left or right arrow button. Thedisplayed arrows and temperature scale willdisappear after a few seconds.

Rear Air OutletsThe outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold airreturn outlet. Be sure to keep it free fromobstructions. Also, keep the area around the baseof the center instrument panel console, betweenand under the front seats, free of objects that couldalso obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.

For more information on how to use the mainclimate control system, see Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 209. For information onventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 212.

214

Rear Climate Control System(Option B, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have a rear climate controlsystem that allows the driver to adjust thefan speed for the rear seating area. This systemworks with the main climate control system in yourvehicle.

This lever is located below the main climatecontrol system on the instrument panel. Use thislever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seatpassengers.

A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increaseor decrease airflow to the rear seating area.Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.

AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rearpassengers to adjust the temperature and airflowto the rear seating area.

Your vehicle may also have a rear climate controlsystem that allows the rear passengers toadjust the temperature and fan speed for the rearseating area.

When the front climate control is in AUX and therear climate control fan or temperature buttonis pressed, the display will show the same airflowmodes as the front climate control system. SeeDual Climate Control System on page 209

The front control must be in AUX position to enableadjustment of the temperature and fan speed on therear control system. If it is not in AUX, pressing thefan or temperature button on the rear climatecontrol will show a DISABLED message on the rearseat entertainment system display.

215

qg (Decrease Setting): Press this button todecrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in the display.

rl (Increase Setting): Press this button toincrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in the display.

9 (Fan)b (Temperature): Press this button onceto enable adjustment of the fan speed. Afterpressing this button, the current fan speed settingwill be highlighted and appear in the on screendisplay. The arrows indicate that to increaseor decrease fan speed, you need to press eitherthe left or right arrow button. The on screen displaywill disappear after a few seconds.

Press this button twice to enable temperatureadjustment. After pressing this button, the currenttemperature settings will be highlighted andappear in the on screen display. The arrowsindicate that to increase or decrease temperature,you need to press either the left or right arrowbutton. The on screen display will disappear aftera few seconds.

Pressing this button a third time will turn off the onscreen display.

QR: Press the up and down arrows to togglebetween the fan and temperature settings.

Rear Air OutletsThe outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold airreturn outlet. Be sure to keep it free fromobstructions. Also, keep the area around the baseof the center instrument panel console, betweenand under the front seats, free of objects that couldalso obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.

For more information on how to use the mainclimate control system, see Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 209. For information onventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 212.

216

Passenger Compartment Air FilterPassenger compartment air, both outside andrecirculated air, is routed through a passengercompartment filter. The filter removes mostparticles from the air, including dust particles.Reductions in airflow, which may occur morequickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needsto be replaced early. For how often to changethe air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance onpage 522.

The access panel for the passenger compartmentair filter is located in the back of the glove box.To replace the filter, do the following:

1. Pull the tab located on the outer access panelup and out.

217

2. Then push the tab, located on the left of theinner access panel, to the right.

3. The first air filter will pull straight out. Toremove the second, reach in and slide ittoward the opening. Pull the second filter out.

4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Makesure the filters are inserted so that the sealingfoam is angled in the same direction onboth filters. For the type of filter to use, seeNormal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 532.

5. Close the inner access door, while squeezingthe tab. Be sure it is tightly closed.

6. Snap the outer access panel into the back ofthe glove box.

218

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next few pages,some warning lights come on briefly when youstart the engine just to let you know they’reworking. If you are familiar with this section, youshould not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there’s a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly — and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lights andgages. They’re a big help.

219

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drivesafely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.

United States version shown, Canada similar

220

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. The new one canbe set to the mileage total of the old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can display how far you havedriven since you last reset it.

For more information see DIC Operation andDisplays on page 235.

Tachometer

The tachometer displaysthe engine speed inrevolutions perminute (rpm).

221

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignitionis on and the vehicle is in motion, the chimeand safety belt light will be repeated. You shouldbuckle your seat belt. If the driver’s belt isalready buckled, neither the chime nor the lightwill come on.

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will come on for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if a passenger isdetected by the passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 93 for moreinformation. The passenger safety belt light will alsocome on and stay on for several seconds, then itwill flash for several more.

You should have thepassenger buckle theirsafety belt.

This light and chime reminder will be repeated ifthe ignition is on, the vehicle is in motion, thepassenger is still unbuckled and the passengerairbag is enabled.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

222

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light comes on ifthere is an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,the wiring and the diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 83.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition keyto RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

223

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped).

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s airbag or airbagsare enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

PassengerAirbag Status

Indicator – United States

Passenger AirbagStatus

Indicator – Canada

224


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s airbag or airbags. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 93 for moreon this, including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of an airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 223.

225

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but theengine is not running,as a check to show youit is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightWhen the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoesn’t release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you havea brake problem.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part isn’t working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be abrake problem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.


226

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedalmay go closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light on page 227 and Towing YourVehicle on page 396.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

Your vehicle has anAnti-lock Brake System(ABS) warning light.

This light should come on for a few seconds whenyou turn the ignition key to RUN. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there is a problem.

If this light stays on longer than normal after youhave started your engine, turn the ignition off. If thelight comes on and stays on when you aredriving, stop as soon as possible and turn theignition off. Then start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light still stays on, or comes onagain while you are driving, the ABS needs serviceand you do not have anti-lock brakes.

227

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a traction controlsystem warning light.

The traction control system warning light maycome on for the following reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing thetraction control button. To turn the systemback on, press the button again. The warninglight should go off. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 365 for moreinformation.

• If there’s a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, thetraction control system will turn off andthe warning light will come on. If your brakesbegin to overheat, the traction controlsystem will turn off and the warning light willcome on until your brakes cool down.

• If the traction control system is affected by anengine-related problem, the system will turnoff and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. Ifthe red gage lamp turns on, your engine is too hot!


228

It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 435.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle.This system is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehiclewith this light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 412.

229

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your retailer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 417.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

230

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 414. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your retailer can check the vehicle. Yourretailer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in orderto help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your retailercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

231

Oil Pressure Light

If you have low engineoil pressure, this lightwill stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when youare driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your GM retailer.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test to showyou it is working. The light will go out when youturn the ignition on. If it does not come on withthe ignition on, you may have a problem withthe fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light mayblink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may come onfor a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystems on page 133.

232

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 188for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light will come onwhen the high-beamheadlamps or theFlash-to-Pass feature isin use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 185.

Fuel Gage

When the indicator nears empty, you still have alittle fuel left, but you should get more soon.

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel youhave left when the ignition is on.


233

Here are four things some owners ask about.All these things are normal and do not indicate thatanything is wrong with the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill upthan the gage reads. For example, thegage read half full, but it took more (or less)than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or speeding up.

• The gage may not indicate empty when theignition is turned off.

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuel gage will come on brieflywhen you are starting the engine.

This light comes on when the fuel tank is low onfuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated in the instrument panel cluster, below thetachometer. The DIC buttons are located onthe center of the instrument panel, below thecenter outlets.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display WELCOMEDRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2 isused, and then the information that was lastdisplayed before the engine was turned off. Thedriver number also corresponds to the numbers,1 or 2, on the back of the remote keyless entrytransmitters.

The DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers,fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle systeminformation, and compass display, if equipped.It also displays warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. In addition, the DIC displaysphone numbers that are called using theOnStar® system, if equipped. See OnStar®

System on page 154.

234

If equipped, the outside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottom right corner ofthe DIC display when viewing all of the informationscreens, except for the oil life screens. If theoutside air temperature is at or below 37°F (3°C),the temperature reading will toggle betweendisplaying the outside temperature and the wordICE for two minutes. If there is a problem with thesystem that controls the temperature display,the letters OC (open circuit) or SC (short circuit)will appear on the display. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced by your retailer.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized or personalized, if equipped. See DICVehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 261 for more information.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe center of the instrument panel. The buttonsare the information, set/reset, and menu buttons.

The button functions are detailed in the followingpages.

DIC Buttons

Q4R (Information): Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip distance, time elapsed,average speed, fuel economy, battery voltage, oillife, and to turn off the DIC.

r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

235

q (Menu): Press this button to display the units,language, personalization, if equipped, compasszone and compass calibration, if equipped.See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 261 and DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) onpage 240 for more information.

Information Button Items

Q4R (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the following items:

OdometerPress the information button until the odometerdisplays. This mode shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles orkilometers.

Trip A and Trip BPress the information button until A or B displays.This mode shows the current distance traveledin either miles or kilometers since the last reset foreach trip odometer. Both trip odometers can beused at the same time.

The display will show the odometer on the top lineand the trip odometer information, either A or B,on the bottom line.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

There is also a retroactive trip odometer functionthat performs the following for each tripodometer:

• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph(5 km/h) during the current ignition cycle,this function will set the trip odometer to thedistance driven during the current ignitioncycle.

• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded 3 mph(5 km/h), this function will set the trip odometerto the distance driven during the previousignition cycle plus the distance driven duringthe current ignition cycle.

Press and hold the set/reset button forthree seconds, then release the button. Theretroactive trip odometer value will be set into thecurrently displayed trip odometer.

236

Time ElapsedPress the information button until TIMEELAPSED :00 displays. This mode is like astopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takesto get from one point to another. Each of thefields for the hours, minutes, and seconds aretwo numeric digits.Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press theset/reset button to start the timing feature.Press the set/reset button again to stop it. If youwill be starting and stopping your vehicle, during atrip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED featurewill automatically start timing where it left off whenyou last stopped. To reset it, press and holdthe set/reset button for approximately 1.5 seconds.The display will return to zero.

Average SpeedPress the information button until AVERAGESPEED displays. This mode shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the various vehicle speedrecorded since the last reset of this value. To resetthe value, press the information button to displayAVERAGE SPEED, then press and hold theset/reset button. The display will return to zero.

Fuel RangePress the information button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This mode shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles or kilometers thevehicle can be driven without refueling.Fuel range is based on several factors, includingdistance travelled, fuel used, fuel capacity,etc. This estimate will change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this mode may readone number, but if the vehicle is driven on afreeway, the number may change even though thesame amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This isbecause different driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economy than citydriving. Fuel range cannot be reset.If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOWwill display followed by the LOW FUEL message.See “LOW FUEL” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 241 for more information.

237

Average Fuel EconomyPress the information button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This mode shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button. The display will return to zero.

BatteryPress the information button until BATTERYdisplays. This mode shows the current batteryvoltage.

Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltagebased on the state of the battery. The batteryvoltage may fluctuate when viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This is normal.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, a DIC message will display. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 241 formore information.

Oil LifePress the information button until OIL LIFEdisplays. This mode shows an estimate of the oil’sremaining useful life. If you see OIL LIFE 99%on the display, that means 99% of the current oillife remains. The engine oil life system willalert you to change your oil on a scheduleconsistent with your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEOIL SOON message will appear on the display.You should change your oil as soon as possible.See Engine Oil on page 423. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 522 for moreinformation.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other than when the oilhas just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 426. The display will show 100%when the system is reset.

238

Menu Button Items

q (Menu): Press this button to scroll through thefollowing items:

UnitsPress the menu button until UNITS displays. Thismode allows you to select between English orMetric units of measurement. Once in this mode,press the set/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC.

LanguagePress the menu button until the language screendisplays. This mode allows you to select thelanguage in which the DIC messages will appear.Once in this mode, press the set/reset buttonto select among the following choices:

• English

• Francais (French)

• Espanol (Spanish)

Personalization (Uplevel Only)Press the menu button until PERSONALPROGRAM displays. Your vehicle may havepersonalization capabilities that allow youto program certain features to a preferred settingfor up to two drivers.

Your vehicle may also have customizationcapabilities that allow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed to one setting onthe vehicle and cannot be programmed to apreferred setting for up to two drivers. See DICVehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 261 for additional information on personalprogramming.

Compass Zone (Uplevel Only)Under certain circumstances, such as during along distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone. To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see DIC Compass (UplevelOnly) on page 240.

239

Compass Calibration (Uplevel Only)The compass can be manually calibrated. Tocalibrate the compass through the DIC, see DICCompass (Uplevel Only) on page 240.

DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)Your vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Compass ZonePress the menu button until COMPASS ZONEdisplays. Press the set/reset button to change thecompass zone. Zones 1 through 15 are available.The direction the vehicle is moving will bedisplayed in the top right corner of the DIC display.

Compass CalibrationUnder certain circumstances, such as during along distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone through the DIC.

Compass variance is the difference between theearth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass in the vehicle could givefalse readings.

In order to do this, the compass must be set orcalibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicleis traveling.

240

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

1. Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location andvariance zone number on the map.

3. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand select the appropriate variance zone.

4. Press the menu button to advance to theCOMPASS CALIBRATION screen.

5. To start the compass calibration, press andhold the set/reset button until CALIBRATIONBEGUN DRIVE UNTIL DONE appears inthe DIC display.

6. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle two timesto activate the compass.When the calibration is complete, the DIC willdisplay CALIBRATION FINISHED.

7. If the message CAL appears in the DIC,you must manually put the compass intothe calibration mode again. RepeatSteps 1 through 6.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

241

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge that you received the messageand clear it from the DIC display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared.

If there are any active warning messages when thevehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and the DICgoes into a reminder mode. The reminder modedisplays any active message. If there are multiplemessages, the DIC displays each message forfive seconds. After each active message isdisplayed once, the reminder mode turns off.

You should take any messages that appear onthe display seriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make the messagesdisappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTIONThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 228. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

This message comes on while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis warning message and to clear it from thescreen.

This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on. If this messagecontinues to appear, have the system repaired byyour retailer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

242

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle thatyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to15.5 volts. You can monitor the battery voltage bypressing the information button until BATTERYdisplays.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your retailer. See EngineOil on page 423 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 522 for more information.

The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset byacknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screenunder the gages menu on the DIC must also bereset. See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation andDisplays on page 235 and Engine Oil Life Systemon page 426.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.


If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

243

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILUREThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourretailer immediately.

This message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap is not on, oris not fully tightened. Check the fuel cap toensure that it is on properly. See Filling the Tankon page 417 for more information.

This message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



244

DELAYED LOCKINGThis message displays to inform the driver thateven though a door lock switch or the lock buttonon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterhas been pressed, that actual locking of the doorsis being delayed because the delayed lockingfeature has been activated in the DIC. See“DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261 formore information.

This message appears and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is off.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

DRIVER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver’s door isnot closed properly. When this message appears,make sure that the driver’s door is closedcompletely.

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shiftedout of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver’s side reardoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the driver’s side rear dooris closed completely.




245

ENGINE COOLANT HOT

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speed above normalidling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 435 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. The engine coolanttemperature warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 228 for moreinformation.

To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off theair conditioner if it is on. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditionercan be turned back on.

This message displays only when the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDThis message displays when the amount ofavailable light outside of the vehicle is low, or thewindshield wipers have been on for approximately30 seconds, and the exterior lamps control isoff or in the park lamps position. This messageinforms the driver that turning on the exterior lampsis recommended. See Exterior Lamps onpage 192 for more information.


246



HOOD AJARIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when the hood is not closedproperly. When this message appears, make surethat the hood is closed completely. See HoodRelease on page 421.




KEY FOB BATTERY LOWThis message displays when the battery in theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs tobe replaced. To replace the battery, see “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless EntrySystem Operation on page 107.




247

KEY IN IGNITIONThis message displays and a chime soundscontinuously when the driver’s door is open andthe key is in ACCESSORY or LOCK.


This message disappears and the chiming stopswhen the key is removed from the ignition.

LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left front turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlampsand Sidemarker Lamps on page 456.




LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left rear turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lampson page 458.




248

LIFT GATE AJARThis message displays when the liftgate is notclosed completely. Make sure that the liftgate isclosed completely. See Liftgate on page 128.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted outof PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



LOW BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays when the brake fluid levelis low. Have the brake system serviced byyour retailer as soon as possible. See Brakes onpage 445 for proper fluid level.

The brake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Brake System WarningLight on page 226.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhile the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



249

LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 233 and Filling the Tankon page 417 for more information.

The message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.


LOW OIL PRESSURE

Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warningmessage appears on the DIC display, stop thevehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. Severe engine damage can resultfrom driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.See Engine Oil on page 423 for moreinformation.

This message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil pressure is low. The oil pressure light alsoappears on the instrument panel cluster. See OilPressure Light on page 232.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by yourretailer as soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.

This message displays only when the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed.

This message cannot be acknowledged andcleared from the screen. This message re-displaysfor a few seconds if the condition still existswhen the engine is turned off.


250

PARKING BRAKE ONThis message displays to alert the driver when thevehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is inRUN, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph(8 km/h). Release the parking brake beforedriving. See Parking Brake on page 147 for moreinformation.


A chime sounds continuously while this messageis displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h).Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.



PARK LAMPS ONThis message displays to alert the driver when theheadlamps or parking lamps are on while theignition is off and the driver’s door is opened. SeeExterior Lamps on page 192 for more information.A chime sounds continuously while this messageis displayed.This message cannot be acknowledged.

PASSENGER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the front passenger’sdoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the front passenger’sdoor is closed completely.This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shiftedout of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.


251

PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the passenger’s siderear door is not closed properly. When thismessage appears, make sure that the passenger’sside rear door is closed completely.




PASSENGER SEATBELT IS NOTFASTENEDThis message reminds you to buckle thepassenger’s safety belt.

This message displays and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt isbuckled, the passenger’s safety belt is unbuckledwith the passenger airbag enabled, and thevehicle is in motion. You should have thepassenger buckle their safety belt.

The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,the vehicle is in motion, the driver is unbuckledand the passenger is still unbuckled and thepassenger airbag is enabled. If the passenger’ssafety belt is already buckled, this messageand chime will not come on.

252

REDUCED ENGINE POWERThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. This happens when drivingconditions, such as climbing a steep hill, make thetransaxle overwork in a gear that may causedamage to the vehicle’s engine or transaxle.Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’sability to accelerate.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFEThis message displays when your vehicle is inan overheated engine operating mode. Thisoperating mode allows your vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergency. In this mode,you will notice a significant loss in power andengine performance. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 437 for moreinformation. Anytime this message is on, thevehicle should be taken to your retailer for serviceas soon as possible.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



253

REMOTE START DISABLEDIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays if a remote start attempt isunsuccessful. This may be caused if any of thefollowing conditions are true when a remotestart attempt is made:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The key is in the ignition.

• The hood or the doors are not closed.

• There is an emission control systemmalfunction.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.

• The maximum number of remote startsor remote start attempts between ignitioncycles has been reached.

• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on whileattempting to remote start the vehicle.

See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261 and“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 107 formore information.

REMOTE START ONIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when a remote start is initiated.See “Remote Vehicle Start” under RemoteKeyless Entry System Operation on page 107 formore information.

RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right front turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlampsand Sidemarker Lamps on page 456.This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

254

RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right rear turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lampson page 458.




SERVICE ABS SYSTEMThis message displays when the vehicle’sAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) is not functioningproperly. Have the ABS serviced by yourretailer as soon as possible.

The ABS warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light on page 227.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.

This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engineis turned off. It also re-displays for two secondsif the message has been acknowledged, butthe condition still exists when the engine isturned off.


255

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays along with the airbagreadiness light if there is a problem with the airbagsystem. Have your retailer inspect the systemfor problems. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 223 and Airbag System on page 83 formore information.




SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays when a problem with thebrake system has been detected. Have yourvehicle serviced by your retailer as soon aspossible.





256

SERVICE PARK LAMPSThis message displays when there is a problemwith the park lamps. Check to see if the park lampfuse is blown and replace the fuse if necessary.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 512 andInstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 512 formore information. If changing the fuse does notcorrect the problem, see your retailer.




SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEMIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays if there has been a problem detected withStabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 367.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If this messagestill stays on or turns back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theStabiliTrak® System inspected by your retailer assoon as possible.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



257

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the system isnot functioning properly. A warning light alsoappears on the instrument panel cluster. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 228. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 365 for more information. Have the TCSserviced by your retailer as soon as possible.




SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your retailer as soon as possible.




STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting youwith directional control of the vehicle. Slipperyroad conditions may exist when this message isdisplayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System on page 367.

258

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. This message stays on until road conditionschange and StabiliTrak® is not active.

This message cannot be acknowledged andcleared from the screen.

STABILITY CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays any time the system turns off. When thismessage has been displayed, StabiliTrak® isno longer available to assist you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 367.

This message displays only while the ignition isin RUN.

Any of the following conditions may cause theStabiliTrak® system to turn off:

• The battery is low.

• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. Seeyour retailer for service.

STARTING DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled due to the electronic throttle controlsystem or vehicle theft-deterrent system.Have your vehicle serviced by your retailerimmediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN and will not disappear until the problem isresolved.


TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVEIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the system ison. Slippery road conditions may exist if thismessage is displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 365 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and will not disappear until driving conditionschange and the TCS is no longer active.

This message cannot be acknowledged or clearedfrom the screen.

259

TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the TCS turnsoff. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 365 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and disappears after two seconds.

Any of the following conditions may cause theTCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing the tractioncontrol button located on the center of theinstrument panel. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 365.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See your retailer forservice.

TRANSMISSION FLUID HOTThis message displays when the transaxle fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until it cools down. If the warningmessage continues to display, have the vehicleserviced by your retailer as soon as possible.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhile the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turnsignal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever onpage 183.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. This messageclears from the DIC if the turn signal is manuallyturned off, a turn is completed, or the messageis acknowledged.

260

DIC Vehicle Personalization(Uplevel Only)Your vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization features canonly be programmed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers. The customizationfeatures include the following:• Exterior lighting delay• Interior lighting delay• Delayed locking• Content theft• Remote keyless entry feedback• Remote start• Rear park chime

Your vehicle may also have personalizationcapabilities that allow you to program certainfeatures to a preferred setting for up to two drivers.The first personalized key corresponds to driver 1and the second personalized key corresponds todriver 2. The driver number also corresponds to thenumbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the remote keylessentry transmitters.

The personalization features include the following:

• Radio station presets

• Auto door unlock preferences

• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences

All of the customization and personalization optionsmay not be available on your vehicle. Only theoptions available will be displayed on your DIC.

The default settings for the customization andpersonalization features were set when yourvehicle left the factory, but may have beenchanged from their default setting since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

The driver’s personalization preferences arerecalled by using the key programmed fordriver 1 or 2. The driver number also correspondsto the numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of theremote keyless entry transmitters.

To change customization and personalizationpreferences, use the following procedure.

261

Entering the Personal Program Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle

in PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the menu button until PERSONALPROGRAM displays.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONALPROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.If the vehicle is not able to enter the personalprogram menu, PERSONAL PROGRAMNOT AVAILABLE will display.

3. Press the set/reset button to begin.

4. The DIC will then display an instructionscreen.Press the menu button to display the modesthat are available to program.Press the set/reset button to change thesetting of each mode.

Customization Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

FACTORY DEFAULTSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization and personalization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the menu button until FACTORYDEFAULTS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

NO (default): The customization andpersonalization features will not be set to theirfactory default settings.

YES: The customization and personalizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

If YES is selected, the keys will need to bepersonalized again to be recognized as key 1 or 2.See “PERSONALIZE KEY” later in this sectionfor more information.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe menu button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.

262

ALL KEYS RESETThis screen will only display if YES was selectedon the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.

Press the set/reset button to scroll through thefollowing choices:

CANCEL (default): The features will not be set totheir factory default settings and the DIC willreturn to the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.

OK: The features will be set to their factory defaultsettings, the DIC will exit the personal programmenu, and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVEDwill display.

EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAYThis feature allows you to set the amount of timethe exterior lamps remain on after the key isremoved from the ignition or the vehicle isunlocked using the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

Press the menu button until EXT LIGHT DELAYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for15 seconds.

30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.




263

INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVEDThis feature enables the interior lamps inthe vehicle to turn on for about 25 seconds afterthe key is removed from the ignition.

Press the menu button until INT LIGHTS KEYSREMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will notcause the interior lamps to turn on.

ON (default): Removing the key from the ignitionwill cause the interior lamps to be turned on forabout 25 seconds.


DELAYED LOCKINGThis feature allows the locking of the vehicle to bedelayed until all of the doors have been closedfor approximately five seconds.

When the delayed locking feature is enabled, itmay be activated when the key is out of theignition by doing one of the following:

• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switchone time while the driver’s door is open.

• Pressing the passenger’s door power lockswitch one time while the passenger’sdoor is open.

• Pressing the lock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter one time while anydoor is open.

Two chimes will sound to signal that delayedlocking is active.

The doors may be locked immediately by repeatingone of the above actions more than one time.

If a door remains open, without any otherdoor being opened or closed, the vehicle will lockafter approximately 45 seconds.

If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lockthe doors. See Delayed Locking on page 116for more information.

264

Press the menu button until DELAYED LOCKINGappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doorswill be delayed by five seconds while a dooris open after a power door lock switch is pressed,or the lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter is pressed while a door is open.


CONTENT THEFTIf your vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, once this feature is turned on, the systemwill activate if someone tries to enter the vehiclewithout using the remote keyless entry transmitteror the correct key. It will also activate when anincorrect key is used in the ignition.

Press the menu button until CONTENT THEFTappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will beturned off.

ON (default): The content theft-deterrent systemwill be turned on.

When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrentsystem will be armed when the vehicle is locked bypressing the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter or by pressing the powerdoor lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 133 and Power Door Locks on page 116for more information.


265

FOB LOCK FEEDBACKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Press the menu button until FOB LOCKFEEDBACK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: There will be no feedback when locking thevehicle.

LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previous command.

Choose one of the available settings and press themenu button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has remote start, this feature allowsthe remote start to be turned OFF or ON. Theremote start feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle using the remotekeyless entry transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 107 for more information.

Press the menu button until REMOTE STARTappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.


REAR PARK CHIMEIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this feature allowsthe URPA system’s chime to be turned OFF orON. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)on page 200 for more information.

266

Press the option button until REAR PARK CHIMEappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The URPA system’s chime will be disabled.

ON (default): The URPA system’s chime willbe enabled.


Personalization Menu ItemsThe following are personalization features thatallow you to program setting for up to two drivers:

PERSONALIZE KEYIf you are using a key that has already beenpersonalized to be recognized as key 1 or 2, thisscreen will not display. This feature allowsyou to personalize a key to be recognized askey 1 or 2. A personalized key allows youto program personalization features to a preferredsetting to correspond to key 1 or 2.

Press the menu button until PERSONALIZE KEYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

NO (default): The key will not be personalized.

YES: The key will be personalized.


REPLACE KEYThis screen displays only if YES was selected forthe PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2have already been personalized, and the currentkey being used is not key 1 or 2. This featureallows you to program a key to be recognized askey 1 or 2 in the event that the previouslyprogrammed key needs to be replaced.

1: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 1.

2: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 2.

CANCEL (default): The key will not beprogrammed.

267

RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZEDThis screen displays only if YES was selected forthe PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This featureallows you to set the radio station presets to berecognized for the key, 1 or 2, that is beingused. Once this message displays, set the radiostation presets. If the presets are not set atthis time, the presets will not be recognized forkey 1 or 2, however, the vehicle radio stationpresets will be maintained.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows automatic door unlocking to beturned off, used for the driver’s door only, or forall of the doors.

Press the menu button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: None of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is takenout of the ignition.

DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the keyis taken out of the ignition.

ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the keyis taken out of the ignition.


AUTO UNLOCK ONThis feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL wasselected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature.This feature allows the selection of when thevehicle’s doors will unlock.

Press the menu button until AUTO UNLOCK ONappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P).


268

FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESSThis feature allows the selection of which doorswill unlock on the first press of the unlockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 107 for more information.

Press the menu button until FOB UNLOCK ON1ST PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlockon the first press of the unlock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first pressof the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe menu button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it. The DIC will then display PRESSUNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY FOB. Press theunlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter and your setting will be saved for thatremote keyless entry transmitter.

After programming the last option, the messageKEY FOB NOW PERSONALIZED will appearon the DIC display for a few seconds if youpersonalized the key. Next, the messagePERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will appear brieflyon the DIC display, then the display will returnto the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.

Exiting the Personal Program MenuThe personal program menu will be exited whenany of the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The end of the personal program menu isreached.

269

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 358. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a fargreater access to audio stations and songlistings. Giving extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving cancause a crash and you or others can beinjured or killed. Always keep your eyeson the road and your mind on thedrive — avoid engaging in extendedsearching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 358.

270

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your retailer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functionsof your vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system. If that equipmentis replaced or additional equipment is added toyour vehicle, the chimes may not work. Makesure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it. See Accessories and Modificationson page 412.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 139 for more information.

271

Setting the TimePress the H or the M button to enter clock mode.Press and hold H until the correct hour appearson the display. Press and hold M until the correctminute appears on the display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press either the H or the M button toenter the clock mode, then press the tune knob toselect between the 12 or 24 hour display format.The clock mode will automatically time out with thechanged display format set as the current defaultsetting.

Radio with CD

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CDsimilar

272

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the display.RDS stations may also provide the time of day,a program type (PTY) for current programming,and the name of the program being broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press this knob toturn the system on and off. Turn this knob toincrease or to decrease the volume.

4 (Information): For RDS, press this button tochange what appears on the display whileusing RDS. The display options are station name,RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name ofthe program (if available).

273

For XM™ (if equipped), press the informationbutton while in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theinformation button until you see the displayyou want, then hold the button for two seconds.The radio produces one beep and the selecteddisplay becomes the default.

AUTO n (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive, byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select AUTO VOLUME MIN, AUTOVOLUME MED, or AUTO VOLUME MAX. Eachhigher setting provides more volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volumeoff, press this button until AUTO VOLUME OFFappears on the display.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again to turn the sound on.

This button is not available on the Radiowith Six-Disc CD.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

t SEEK u: Press the right or the left arrow to goto the next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears onthe display. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the next station.Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor four seconds until PRESET SCAN appears onthe display. The radio goes to the next presetstation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext preset station. Press either scan arrow againor one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

274

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set returns andthe equalization that was selected is storedfor that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

e (Bass/Treble/Midrange): Press this knob toselect BASS, MIDRANGE, or TREBLE. Turnthe knob to increase or to decrease. If a station isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when thetone control is on the display. The level changesto the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when notone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIOSETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Pressthis button to select customized equalizationsettings designed for country/western, jazz, talk,pop, rock, and classical. Selecting CUSTOMor changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

275

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisknob until BALANCE appears on the display.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this knob until FADE appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middleposition, press and hold this knob when thespeaker control is on the display. The levelchanges to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when notone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIOSETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.

Finding a Category Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:

1. Press the CAT button. The last selectedcategory appears on the display.

2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to take you to a category’sstation. SEEKING CATEGORY appears onthe display.

4. To go to another station within that category,press the CAT button to display the category,then press either SEEK arrow to go toanother station.

If both category and traffic are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected categoryand traffic announcements. This function does notwork with XM™.

If the radio cannot find the desired category,NONE appears on the display and the radioreturns to the last station you were listening to.This function does not work with XM™.

276

SCAN: Scan the stations within a category byperforming the following:

1. Press the CAT button. The last selectedcategory appears on the display.

2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, pressand hold either SCAN arrow until you hear abeep and SCAN CATEGORY appears onthe display. The radio begins scanningthe stations in the category.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.

If both category and TRAF are on, the radio scansfor stations with the selected category andtraffic announcements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to a strongerstation with the same category. To turn alternatefrequency on, press and hold BAND for fourseconds. AF ON appears on the display. The radiomay switch to stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for four seconds. AF OFF appears onthe display. The radio does not switch to otherstations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

277

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcement comeson the current radio station, ALERT! appears on thedisplay. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

4 (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO appears on the display. Pressthis button to see the message. The message maydisplay the artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release thisbutton. A new group of words appears on thedisplay after every press of the button. Once thecomplete message has displayed, INFO disappearsfrom the display until another new message isreceived. The last message can be displayed by

pressing this button. You can view the last messageuntil a new message is received or a differentstation is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO appears on the display.

TRAF (Traffic): If TA appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcementsand when a traffic announcement comes onthe tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio stops seeking and TA appears onthe display. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC appearson the display.

If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement even ifthe volume is low. The radio interrupts theplay of a CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

278

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, itmeans that the radio has not been configuredproperly for your vehicle and must be returned toyour retailer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your retailer when reporting theproblem.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 293 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbolappears on the display. As each new track starts toplay the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playbackperformance) may be reduced due to the CD-Rquality, method of recording, the quality ofthe music that has been recorded, and the waythe CD-R has been handled. For better playbackperformance when home burning audio discs,use brand named CD media showing the CompactDisc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.

There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs onpage 355 for more information.

279

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the nextor previous track.

{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse the current track.

| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button tofast forward through the current track.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RANDOM DISC appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off random play.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear atrack over again. REPEAT appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off repeat play.


t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thestart of the next track. If either arrow is heldor pressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

280

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD while listening to the radio. CD appears on thedisplay when a CD is in the player. If the systemhas a remote playback device, pressing this buttona second time allows the remote device to play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD.EJECT may be activated with either the ignition orradio off.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playing whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.


There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface ofthe CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDson page 355 for more information.


281


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the load button.

3. When INSET CD # appears on the display,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds.A beep will sound and LOAD ALL DISCappears on the display.

3. When INSERT CD # appears on the display,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD #to appear on the display, then load the nextCD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do nottry to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the load button to cancel the loadingfunction. The radio begins to play the last CDloaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD appears on the display.

282

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number appears on thedisplay. To play a specific CD press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD.

If an error appears on the display, see“CD Messages” later in this section.

X (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease this button.

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the eject button fortwo seconds.A beep will sound and EJECT ALL DISCSappears on the display.

2. When REMOVE DISC appears on the display,the CD ejects and can be removed.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the load orthe eject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, theCD automatically pulls back into the player. If CDis pushed back into the player, before the25 second time period is complete, the playersenses an error and tries to eject the CD severaltimes before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the eject button to eject aCD after you have tried to push it in manually.The player’s 25-second eject timer resets at eachpress of eject, causing the player to not ejectthe CD until the 25-second time period haselapsed.


{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse within the current track.

| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button tofast forward through the current track.

283

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential order, onone CD or all of the loaded CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release thisbutton until RANDOM DISC PLAY appears onthe display.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and releasethis button until RANDOM ALL DISCS appearson the display.

To turn off random play, press and release theRDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on thedisplay.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a trackor an entire CD over again.

To use repeat, do one of the following:

• To repeat a track, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT appears on the display.

• To repeat an entire CD, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT ONE DISC appears onthe display.

To turn off repeated play, press and release theRPT button until REPEAT OFF appears onthe display.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Presseither SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CDSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds ofthe first track of each loaded CD. Press eitherSCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

284

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. CD appears on thedisplay when a CD is in the player. If yoursystem is equipped with a remote playback device,pressing this button a second time allows theremote device to play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio may have the MP3 feature.If it has this feature, it is capable of playing an MP3CD-R disc. For more information on how to playan MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3 onpage 287 later in this section.

Using R (Song List) Mode(Single CD, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections. To save tracks into the song listfeature, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD.

2. Check to see that the CD player is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not appearon the display. If S-LIST is present, press thesong list button to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKright arrow or turn the tune knob to locatethe track to be saved. The track beginsto play.

4. Press and hold the song list button to savethe track into memory. When song list ispressed, one beep will sound. ADDED SONGappears on the display.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

SONGLIST FULL appears on the display if you tryto save more than 20 selections.

285

To play the song list, press the song list button.The recorded tracks begins to play in theorder they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEKarrows. Seeking past the last saved track returnsto the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST appears on the display.

3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the tuneknob to select the desired track to bedeleted.

4. Press and hold the song list button fortwo seconds. Release the button whenSONG REMOVED appears on the display.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform the followingsteps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST appears on the display.

3. Press and hold the song list button for morethan four seconds. One beep will sound.SONGLIST EMPTY appears on the displayindicating the song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the song list button.One beep will sound and S-LIST is removedfrom the display.

286

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your retailer when reporting theproblem.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wplextension, other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum will be available for display by theradio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

287

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usuallybetter to burn the disc all at once.

• Do not use CD-RW discs.

• Do not use colored discs.

The player will be able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files. Long file names, folder names,or playlist names may use more disc memoryspace than necessary. To conserve space on thedisc, minimize the length of the file, folder, orplaylist names. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum cannot be accessed.

Root DirectoryThe root directory will be treated as a folder. If theroot directory has compressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All filescontained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder will not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles will be located under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functions will not functionon a CD that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

288

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)first and then go to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. See the information button later inthis section for more information. The new trackname appears on the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamewill not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

289

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING appearson the display. The CD should begin playing andthe CD symbol appears on the display.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberappears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.


There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface ofthe CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDson page 355 for more information.



Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.


290


{ (Previous Folder): Press this button to go tothe first track in the previous folder. Press and holdthis button to reverse through the current track.

| (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go tothe first track in the next folder. Press and holdthis button to fast forward the current track.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential order, onone CD, one folder, or all of the loaded CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release thisbutton until RANDOM DISC appears onthe display.

• To play the tracks in the folder you arelistening to in random order, press and releasethis button until RANDOM FOLDER appearson the display.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and releasethis button until RANDOM ALL appears on thedisplay.

To turn off random play, press and release theRDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on thedisplay.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track,CD, or a folder over again.

To use repeat, do one of the following:

• To repeat a track, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT TRACK appears onthe display.

• To repeat a CD, press and release this buttonuntil REPEAT DISC appears on the display.

• To repeat a folder, press and releasethis button until REPEAT FOLDER appears onthe display.

To turn off repeated play, press and release theRPT button until REPEAT OFF appears onthe display.

291


This button is not available on the Radiowith Six-Disc CD.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

4 (Information): Press this button to display theartist name and album contained in the ID3 tag.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symbolappears on the display when a CD is loaded.

Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition orradio off.

292

XM Radio MessagesRadio Display Message Condition Action RequiredXL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

293

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredNot Found No channel available for

the chosen categoryThere are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourretailer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment System(Option A, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it hasthis feature, it will include a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets ofwireless headphones (if included), and a remotecontrol.

294

Parental Control

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.Press this button while using RSA, or when aDVD or CD is playing to blank the video screenand to mute the audio. The power indicatorlights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on theparental control will also disable all other buttonoperations from the remote control and theDVD player, except for the eject button. Press thisbutton again to restore operation of the RSA,DVD player, and remote control.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume play ifthe vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. Ifno disc is in the player, the system will power upin auxiliary mode.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.The driver cannot safely view the video screenwhile driving and should not try to do so. The RSEsystem will play DVD, CD, and MP3 discs. You canalso connect an auxiliary device to the RSE systemto play games, watch videos, look at pictures, etc.

Normal operation may be limited under extremelylow or high temperatures, in order to protectthe system from damage. Operate the RSE systemunder normal or comfortable cabin temperatureranges.

HeadphonesWireless HeadphonesThe RSE system may include two sets of wirelessheadphones (batteries are included).

The wireless headphones have an ON/OFFswitch, a channel select switch, and a volumecontrol. To use the headphones, turn the switch toON. An indicator light on the headphones willilluminate. If the light does not illuminate,the batteries may need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to OFFwhen not in use.

The headphones will shut off automatically to savethe battery power if the RSE system is shut offor if the headphones are out of range of thetransmitters for more than three minutes. Thetransmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate.

295

If you move too far forward or step out of thevehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.

DVD and auxiliary audio will always be foundon channel (CHA or CH1) of the wirelessheadphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB orCH2 of the wireless headphones.

To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,use the volume control.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissingnoise through the speakers and/or headphones.If the hissing sound in the wireless headphonesseems excessive, make sure that the headphonebatteries are fully charged. Some amount ofhissing is normal.

Both sets of rear seat headphones may includefoam ear pads that can be replaced.

Foam ear pads on these headphones may becomeworn or damaged. The headphone foam ear padscan become damaged if they are not handled orstored properly. If the foam ear pads do becomedamaged or worn out, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set. It is notnecessary to replace the complete headphone set.

The headphone replacement foam ear pads canbe ordered in pairs. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartmentdoor located on the left side of the headphoneearpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Tighten the screw on the batterycompartment door.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries, and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

296

Wired HeadphonesThere is a right and left wired headphone jack.To adjust the volume, do the following:

1. Plug the headphone into the correspondingjack, located behind the video screen, nextto the auxiliary jacks.

2. Press the corresponding headphone button onthe DVD faceplate.

3. Press the right and left arrow buttons, on theDVD faceplate, to increase or to decrease thevolume.

The wired headphones work as follows:

• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones willplay RSE audio.

• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones willplay RSA audio.

• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones willplay RSA audio.

Stereo RCA Jacks

The RCA jacks are located behind the videoscreen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allowaudio and video signals to be connected froman auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a videogame unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack isused for video inputs, the red RCA jack for rightaudio inputs, and the white RCA jack for left audioinputs. The system requires standard RCAcables, not included, to connect the auxiliarydevice to the RCA jacks. Refer to themanufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

297

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,connect an external auxiliary device such as acamcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both theauxiliary device power and the power on thefront of the RSE player.

If a disc is present when the RSE power is turnedon, the player will automatically begin playingthe disc and the user will need to press the AUXbutton on the remote control or on the DVDplayer faceplate to switch the system between theDVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVDPlayer” and “Remote Control” later in this sectionfor more information.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary devicescan be heard through the following possiblesources:

• Vehicle Speakers

• Wireless Headphones

• Wired Headphones (not included)

Vehicle SpeakersOnly one audio source can be heard through thevehicle’s speakers at a time.

The RSE system or an auxiliary device can beheard through all of the vehicle’s speakers whenthe following occurs:

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

• The front audio system is on and the CD AUXbutton is pressed to enable the RSE system

DVD will appear on the radio display when theRSE system is on.

To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, pressthe CD AUX button on the radio. The audiofrom the RSE system can be heard through thewireless headphones and the vehicles speakers atthe same time. The volume on the radio mayvary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,MP3, or an auxiliary device.

298

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push forward on the release button and thescreen will fold down.

2. Adjust its position as desired.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its stowed and latched position.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overheadconsole.

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttonson the DVD player and/or by the buttons onthe remote control. See “Remote Control” later inthis section for more information.

The RSE system DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate region code forthe country that the vehicle was sold. The DVDregion code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, enhancedCDs, video CDs, and CD-ROM with MP3media are supported by this DVD player. DVD+R,DVD+RW, and copy protected CDs may ormay not be supported by the DVD player. TheDVD player does not support DVD-RAM,DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R/W, and DVD audiomedia. An error message will appear on thedisplay if this type of media is inserted into theDVD player.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

299

DVD Player Buttons

cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release thisbutton to stop playing, rewinding, or fastforwarding.

Press this button twice to eject a disc. If theplayer is already stopped, then only press thisbutton once.

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVDplayer on and off.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarydevice.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a disc. Press this button while a disc isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continue playof a disc.

tr /[u (Previous and Fast Reverse/Nextand Fast Forward): These controls can beused to move forward or backward through a disc.

These buttons can also be used to modify RSA,rear temperature, rear fan speed, and wiredheadphone volume adjustment. See “Headphones”earlier in this section, Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Option A, Uplevel) on page 325 or RearSeat Audio (RSA) (Option B, Uplevel) onpage 328, and Rear Climate Control System(Option A, Uplevel) on page 212 or Rear ClimateControl System (Option B, Uplevel) on page 215for more information.

When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and theRSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pausebuttons are the only buttons that will work.

300

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD playerwill continue loading the disc and the player willautomatically start if the vehicle is inACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure thatthe DVD player is on, then press the play/pausebutton on the player faceplate or on the remotecontrol. You can also, press the CD AUX button onthe radio faceplate, until RSE appears on thedisplay, to start playing a disc.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or previews.Some DVDs will begin playing after the previewshave finished. If the DVD does not begin playing atthe main title, refer to the on-screen instructions.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release the stopbutton on the DVD player faceplate or theremote control.

To resume playback, press the play/pause buttonon the DVD player faceplate or the remotecontrol. The movie should resume play from whereit was last stopped if the disc has not beenejected.

If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resumeplay at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the DVD playerfaceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject thedisc. There is not an eject button on theremote control.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but notremoved, the DVD player will reload the disc aftera short period of time.

301

Remote ControlThe RSE system will include a remote control(batteries are included). To use the remote control,aim it at the transmitter window next to the RSEfaceplate and press the desired button. Directsunlight or very bright light may affect the ability ofthe transmitter to receive signals from theremote control. If the remote control does notseem to be working, the batteries may need to bereplaced. See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section. Objects blocking the line of sight willaffect the function of the remote control.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons


P (Backlight): Press this button to turn theremote control backlighting on. The backlight willautomatically turn off after eight seconds.

v (Title): Press this button to display the currenttitle number. Each press of this button willmove the disc to the next available title.

302

n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to move through DVD menus.

The up and down arrows will move through MP3folders.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoice that is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Control Button): Press this buttonto open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menusto adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, anddisplay modes.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to view themain DVD menu. The menu is different on everydisc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the menu. Aftermaking a selection, press the enter button.

q (Return): Press this button to go back onestep in the RSE OSD menu and some DVDmenus. Press this button to exit the current menuand to move to the previous menu.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a disc. Press this button while a disc isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the disc.

t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the current chapter or track.Press this button again to return to the previouschapter or track. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor previews.

u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, pressthe play or stop button. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,press the play or stop button. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

303

e (Sound): Press this button to display thecurrent audio track. Each press will move the DVDto the next language or commentary. The formatand content of this function will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display thecurrent subtitles. Each press of this buttonwill move the DVD to the next available subtitleoption (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).The format and content of this function will varyfor each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to display thecurrent camera angle on DVDs that havethis feature. Each press will move the DVD to thenext available camera angle. The format andcontent of this function will vary for each disc.

0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within two secondsafter inputting a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this buttonto select chapter or track numbers greaterthan nine. Press this button before inputting thenumber.

RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) MenuTo use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD oran auxiliary device, do the following:

To access this menu, press the display button onthe remote control. Once the menu is on thescreen, use the directional arrows and the enterbutton to navigate the screen. This menu willlet you select default preferences for video format,language preference, brightness, color, contrast,and tint. Not all DVDs support all the featuredefaults in the setup menus. If a feature is notsupported, the defaults will be provided bythe DVD media. To exit this menu, press thedisplay or the return button on the remote controlor wait for the menu to time out.

The default language selection will apply to allfuture DVDs.

304

To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD oran MP3, do the following:

Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in theRSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,then press the display button on the remotecontrol. Once the menu is on the screen, use thedirectional arrows and the enter button tonavigate the screen. This menu will let you selectdefault preferences for language and playbacksettings. To exit this menu, press the display or thereturn button on the remote control or wait forthe menu to time out.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Slide the battery door, located on the back ofthe remote control, down.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Tips and Troubleshooting ChartProblem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition may not bein ACCESSORY, RUN,or RAP.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed. The powerindicator lights will flash.The system might be inauxiliary source mode.Press the AUX button toswitch between the DVDplayer and the auxiliarysource. The disc is upsidedown or is not compatible.

No sound — WirelessHeadphones

Turn the headphones on.Make sure the correctchannel is selected on thewireless headphones.Check the batteries.The volume on theheadphones could be toolow, adjust the volume.

305

Problem Recommended ActionNo sound — WiredHeadphones

Make sure the wiredheadphones are pluggedin. Adjust the volume. IfRSA is on, DVD audio willnot be heard.

No sound — VehicleSpeakers

If the DVD system isbeing heard through thevehicle speakers, adjustthe volume on the radio.Press the CD AUX buttonon the radio to make surethat RSE is enabled. Therear speakers will mutewhen RSA is on.

The picture is distortedduring fast forward orreverse.

This is normal for thisoperation.

The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Video mode may not becorrectly set. See “RSEOSD” earlier in thissection.

I ejected the disc andtried to take it out, butit was pulled back intothe slot.

Press the ejectbutton once.

Problem Recommended ActionThe language in the audioor on the screen is wrong.

Press the main menubutton on the remotecontrol and change theaudio or languageselection on the DVDmenu. To change thelanguage preference,press the display button toaccess the RSE OSDmenu. See “RSE OSD”earlier in this section.

The remote control doesnot work.

Point the remote controldirectly at the face of theDVD unit. The batteriescould be weak or put inwrong. The parentalcontrol button might havebeen pressed, the powerindicator lights will flash.

How do I get subtitles onor off?

Press the subtitle buttonon the remote control toselect subtitle option or goto the DVDs main menuand follow the screenprompts.

306

Problem Recommended ActionThe auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Press and release theAUX button on the remotecontrol or the DVD playerto get to auxiliary input.Check to make sure thatthe auxiliary source isconnected to the inputsproperly.

The audio or video skipsor jumps.

The DVD could be dirty orscratched. Try cleaningthe disc.

The fast forward, fastreverse, previous, andnext functions do not work.

Some commands that doone thing for DVDs will notalways work or perform thesame function for audio,audio discs, or games.These functions may alsobe disabled when the DVDis playing the copyrightinformation or thepreviews. When RSA ison, these buttons controlRSA functions.

Problem Recommended ActionMy disc is stuck in theplayer. The eject buttondoes not work.

Press the eject button onthe DVD player. Turn theignition off, then on again,then press the ejectbutton on the DVD player.Do not attempt to force orremove the disc from theplayer. If the problempersists, return to yourretailer for furtherassistance.

I lost the remote controland/or the headphones.

Contact your retailer forassistance.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes for a moment,then it comes back.

This could be caused byinterference from celltowers or by using thecellular telephone or otherradio transmitter devicesin the vehicle.

307

Problem Recommended ActionDVD System inoperable. In severe or extreme

temperatures the DVDsystem might not beoperable. Temperaturesbelow −4°F (−20°C) orabove 140°F (60°C) coulddamage the DVD system.Operate the DVD systemunder normal orcomfortable cabintemperature ranges. Seeyour retailer if the problempersists.

The wireless headphoneshave audio distortion.

Verify that theheadphones are facing tothe front of the vehicle,left and right sides areindicated on theheadphones to ensurethat the signal is receivedproperly.Verify that there is noobstruction between theheadphone(s) and thetransmitter.Verify that the batterieshave a full charge.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal comingfrom the auxiliary deviceand make sure that theconnection and the signalis good.

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on thevideo screen.

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if thedisc is not readable, or if the disc format isnot compatible.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayedif the mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratchedor damaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message will bedisplayed if the region code of the DVD is notcompatible with the region code of the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message will bedisplayed if the disc is not properly loaded orejected.

No Disc: This message will be displayed whenyou try to play or eject a disc that is not inthe player.

X: An X will be displayed, in the upper left cornerof the video screen, if the operation that hasbeen selected is not currently available.

308

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with video distortionwhen operating cellular phones, scanners, CBradios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-wayradios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate andbuttons, use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen, asdamage may result.

Rear Seat Entertainment System(Option B, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it hasthis feature, it will include a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets ofwireless headphones, and a remote control.

Parental Control

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen, next to the auxiliary jacks.Press this button while using rear seat audio (RSA),or when a DVD or CD is playing to make the videoscreen go blank and to mute the audio. The powerindicator lights on the DVD player will flash. Turningon the parental control will also disable all otherbutton operations from the remote control and theDVD player, except for the eject button. Press thisbutton again to restore operation of the RSA, DVDplayer, and remote control.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and to automatically resume playof a disc that is in the player while the vehicle is on.If no disc is in the player, the system will power upand display no display on the LCD screen.

309

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.The RSE system can play DVD, CD, and MP3discs. You can also connect an auxiliary device tothe RSE system to play games, watch videos,look at pictures, etc.

Normal operation may be limited under extremelylow or high temperatures, in order to protectthe system from damage. Operate the RSE systemunder normal or comfortable cabin temperatureranges.

Headphones

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

Wireless HeadphonesThe RSE system may include two sets of wirelessheadphones (batteries may be included withthe headphone sets).

The wireless headphones have an ON/OFFswitch, a channel select switch, and a volumecontrol. To use the headphones, turn the ON/OFFswitch to ON. An indicator light on the headphoneswill come on. If the light does not come on, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to OFF whennot in use.

The headphones will shut off automatically to savethe battery power if the RSE system is off or ifthe headphones are out of range of thetransmitters for more than three minutes. Thetransmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate.If you move too far forward or step out of thevehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.

DVD and auxiliary audio will always be foundon channel (CHA or CH1) of the wirelessheadphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB orCH2 of the wireless headphones.

310

To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,use the volume control located on theheadphones.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissingnoise through the speakers and/or headphones.If the hissing sound in the wireless headphonesseems excessive, make sure that the headphonebatteries are fully charged. Some amount ofhissing is normal.

Both sets of rear seat headphones may includefoam ear pads that can be replaced.

Foam ear pads on these headphones maybecome worn or damaged. The headphone foamear pads can become damaged if they are nothandled or stored properly. If the foam ear pads dobecome damaged or worn out, the pads can bereplaced separately from the headphone set.It is not necessary to replace the completeheadphone set.

The headphone replacement foam ear pads canbe ordered in pairs. See your retailer for moreinformation.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartmentdoor located on the left side of the headphoneearpiece.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctlyusing the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Tighten the screw on the batterycompartment door.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries, and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

Wired HeadphonesThere is a right and left wired headphone jack.To adjust the volume, do the following:

1. Plug the headphone into the correspondingjack, located behind the video screen, nextto the auxiliary jacks.

311

2. Press the headphone volume control buttonuntil the Wired Headset Volume is displayedand the Left wired headphone is highlightedfor selection. Press the volume control buttonagain to select the Right volume control.Another way to select either the Left or RightWired Headset Volume is to press the upor down arrows on the DVD faceplate.

3. Press the right and left arrow buttons on theDVD faceplate to increase or to decrease thevolume. Press the headphone volumecontrol button again or wait for a few secondsuntil the screen disappears.

The wired headphones work as follows:

• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones willplay RSE audio.

• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones willplay RSA audio.

• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones willplay RSA audio.

Stereo RCA Jacks

The RCA jacks are located behind the videoscreen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allowaudio and video signals to be connected froman auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a videogame unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack isused for video input, the red RCA jack forright audio inputs, and the white RCA jack for leftaudio inputs. The system requires standardRCA cables, not included, to connect the auxiliarydevice to the RCA jacks. Refer to themanufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

312

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,connect an external auxiliary device such as acamcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both theauxiliary device power and the power on thefront of the RSE player.

If a disc is present when the RSE power is turnedon, the player may automatically begin playingthe disc. Press the AUX button on the remotecontrol or the DVD AUX button on the DVD playerfaceplate to switch the system between theDVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVDPlayer” and “Remote Control” later in this sectionfor more information.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary devicescan be heard through the following sources:

• Vehicle Speakers

• Wireless Headphones

• Wired Headphones (not included)

Vehicle SpeakersOnly one audio source can be heard through thevehicle’s speakers at a time.

The RSE system or an auxiliary device can beheard through all of the vehicle’s speakers whenthe following occurs:

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

• The front audio system is on and the CD AUXbutton is pressed to enable the RSE system

DVD appears on the radio display when the RSEsystem is on.

To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, pressthe CD AUX button on the radio. The audiofrom the RSE system can be heard through thewireless headphones and the vehicles speakers atthe same time. The volume on the radio mayvary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,MP3, or an auxiliary device.

313

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button and the screen willfold down.

2. Adjust its position as desired.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its stowed and latched position.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overheadconsole.

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttonson the DVD player and/or by the buttons onthe remote control. See “Remote Control” later inthis section for more information.

The RSE system DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate region code forthe country that the vehicle was sold. The DVDregion code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

The player is capable of playing the followingmedia formats: DVD (single and dual player),DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, DVD-ROM with MP3,DVD-ROM with WMA, CD-DA, CD-R/RW,CD-ROM with MP3, CD-ROM with WMA,Enhanced CD, SACD (CD player only). An errormessage may appear on the display if anyother type of media is inserted into the DVDplayer.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

314

DVD Player Buttons

cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release thisbutton to stop playing, rewinding, or fastforwarding.

Press this button twice to eject a disc. If theplayer is already stopped, then only press thisbutton once.

DVD AUX (Disc Auxiliary): Press this button toswitch the system between the DVD player and anauxiliary device.

rj (Play/Pause): Press the play button to startplay of a disc. Press the pause button while adisc is playing to pause it. Press it again tocontinue play of a disc.

43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press thisbutton to select the correct headphone. Then pressthe left or right arrow buttons to increase ordecrease the headphone volume.

When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and theRSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pausebuttons are the only buttons that will work.

RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press thisbutton to switch between playing the AM, FM1,FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one of thesources are not loaded, the system will skipover the source when this button is pressed.

q, Q, r, R (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to move through DVD menus.


g (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, pressthe play or stop button. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

RSE Faceplate with Rear Seat Climate Controlsshown, RSE Faceplate without Rear Seat Climate

Controls similar

315

l (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD and CD. To stop forwarding,press the play or stop button. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

MENU (Disc): Press this button to view the mainDVD menu. The menu is different on everydisc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the menu. Aftermaking a selection, press the enter button.

r (Enter/Select): Press this button to selectthe choice that is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Control Button): For vehicleswithout rear seat climate control, this button willtake the place of the fan/temp button. For vehicleswith rear seat climate control, this button is alsofound on the remote control. Press this buttonto open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menusto adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, anddisplay modes.

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD playerwill continue loading the disc and the player willautomatically start if the vehicle is inACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure thatthe DVD player is on, then press the play/pausebutton on the player faceplate or on the remotecontrol. You can also press the DVD AUX buttonon the player faceplate, or the CD AUX buttonon the radio faceplate until RSE appears onthe display, to start playing a disc.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or previews.Some DVDs will begin playing after the previewshave finished. If the DVD does not begin playing atthe main title, refer to the on-screen instructions.

316

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release the stopbutton on the DVD player faceplate or theremote control.

To resume playback, press the play/pause buttonon the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.The movie should resume play from where it waslast stopped if the disc has not been ejected.

If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resumeplay at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the DVD playerfaceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject thedisc. There is no eject button on the remotecontrol.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but notremoved, the DVD player will reload the disc aftera short period of time.

Remote ControlThe RSE system includes a remote control(batteries may be included with the remotecontrol). To use the remote control, aim it at thetransmitter window next to the RSE faceplate andpress the desired button. Direct sunlight or verybright light may affect the ability of the transmitterto receive signals from the remote control. Ifthe remote control does not seem to be working,the batteries may need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objectsblocking the line of sight will affect the functionof the remote control.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

317

Remote Control Buttons


P (Backlight): Press this button to turn theremote control backlighting on. The backlight willautomatically turn off after eight seconds.

v (Title): Press this button to display the currenttitle number. Each press of this button willmove the disc to the next available title.

n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to move through DVD menus.


r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoice that is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Control Button): Press this buttonto open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menusto adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, anddisplay modes.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to view themain DVD menu. The menu is different on everydisc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the menu. Aftermaking a selection, press the enter button.

q (Return): Press this button to go backone step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVDmenus. Press this button to exit the currentmenu and to move to the previous menu.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.

318

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a disc. Press this button while a disc isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the disc.

t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the current chapter or track.Press this button again to return to the previouschapter or track. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor previews.

u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, pressthe play or stop button. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,press the play or stop button. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

e (Sound): Press this button to display thecurrent audio track. Each press will move the DVDto the next language or commentary. The formatand content of this function will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display thecurrent subtitles. Each press of this buttonwill move the DVD to the next available subtitleoption (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).The format and content of this function will varyfor each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to display thecurrent camera angle on DVDs that havethis feature. Each press will move the DVD to thenext available camera angle. The format andcontent of this function will vary for each disc.

0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

319

\ (Clear): Press this button within two secondsafter entering a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this buttonto select chapter or track numbers greaterthan 9. Press this button before entering thenumber.

RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) MenuTo use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD oran auxiliary device, do the following:

To access this menu, press the display button onthe remote control or on the DVD faceplate, ifyou do not have rear seat climate control. Oncethe menu is on the screen, use the directionalarrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.This menu will let you select default preferencesfor video format, language preference, brightness,color, contrast, and tint. Not all DVDs supportall the feature defaults in the setup menus.

If a feature is not supported, the defaults will beprovided by the DVD media. To exit this menu,press the display button, or the return buttonon the remote control, or faceplate if there is norear seat climate control, or wait for the menuto time out.

The default language selection will apply to allfuture DVDs.

To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD oran MP3, do the following:

Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in theRSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,then press the display button on the remotecontrol, or faceplate if there is no rear seat climatecontrol. Once the menu is on the screen, usethe directional arrows and the enter buttonto navigate the screen. This menu lets you selectdefault preferences for language and playbacksettings. To exit this menu, press the displaybutton, or the return button on the remote control,or faceplate if there is no rear seat climatecontrol, or wait for the menu to time out.

320

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Slide the battery door, located on the back ofthe remote control, down.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Close the battery door.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Tips and Troubleshooting ChartProblem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition may not bein ACCESSORY, RUN,or RAP.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed. The powerindicator lights will flash.The system might be inauxiliary source mode.Press the DVD AUXbutton on the playerfaceplate or the AUXbutton on the remote toswitch between the DVDplayer and the auxiliarysources. The disc isupside down or is notcompatible.

No sound — WirelessHeadphones

Turn the headphones on.Make sure the correctchannel is selected on thewireless headphones.Check the batteries.The volume on theheadphones could be toolow, adjust the volume.

321

Problem Recommended ActionNo sound — WiredHeadphones

Make sure the wiredheadphones are pluggedin. Adjust the volume. IfRSA is on, DVD audio willnot be heard.

No sound — VehicleSpeakers

If the DVD system isbeing heard through thevehicle speakers, adjustthe volume on the radio.Press the CD AUX buttonon the radio to make surethat RSE is enabled. Therear speakers will mutewhen RSA is on.

The picture is distortedduring fast forward orreverse.

This is normal for thisoperation.

The picture does not fill thescreen. There are blackborders on the top andbottom or on both sides orit looks stretched out.

Video mode may not becorrectly set. See “RSEOSD” earlier in thissection.

I ejected the disc and triedto take it out, but it waspulled back into the slot.

Press the ejectbutton once.

Problem Recommended ActionThe language in the audioor on the screen is wrong.

Press the main menubutton on the remotecontrol and change theaudio or languageselection on the DVDmenu. To change thelanguage preference,press the display button toaccess the RSE OSDmenu. See “RSE OSD”earlier in this section.

The remote control doesnot work.

Point the remote controldirectly at the face of theDVD unit. The batteriescould be weak or put inwrong. The parentalcontrol button might havebeen pressed, the powerindicator lights will flash.

How do I get subtitles onor off?

Press the subtitle buttonon the remote control toselect subtitle option or goto the DVDs main menuand follow the screenprompts.

322

Problem Recommended ActionThe auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Press and release theAUX button on the remotecontrol or the DVD AUXbutton on the playerfaceplate to get toauxiliary input. Check tomake sure that theauxiliary source isconnected to the inputsproperly.

The audio or video skipsor jumps.

The DVD could be dirty orscratched. Try cleaningthe disc.

The fast forward, fastreverse, previous, andnext functions do not work.

Some commands that doone thing for DVDs will notalways work or perform thesame function for audio,audio discs, or games.These functions may alsobe disabled when the DVDis playing the copyrightinformation or thepreviews. When RSA ison, these buttons maycontrol RSA functions.

Problem Recommended ActionMy disc is stuck in theplayer. The eject buttondoes not work.

Press the eject button onthe DVD player. Turn theignition off, then on again,then press the ejectbutton on the DVD player.Do not attempt to force orremove the disc from theplayer. If the problempersists, return to yourretailer for furtherassistance.

I lost the remote controland/or the headphones.

Contact your retailer forassistance.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes for a moment,then it comes back.

This could be caused byinterference from celltowers or by using thecellular telephone or otherradio transmitter devicesin the vehicle.

323

Problem Recommended ActionDVD System inoperable. In severe or extreme

temperatures the DVDsystem might not beoperable. Temperaturesbelow −4°F (−20°C) orabove 140°F (60°C) coulddamage the DVD system.Operate the DVD systemunder normal orcomfortable cabintemperature ranges. Seeyour retailer if the problempersists.

The wireless headphoneshave audio distortion.

Verify that theheadphones are facing tothe front of the vehicle,left and right sides areindicated on theheadphones to ensurethat the signal is receivedproperly.Verify that there is noobstruction between theheadphone(s) and thetransmitter.Verify that the batterieshave a full charge.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal comingfrom the auxiliary deviceand make sure that theconnection and the signalis good.

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on thevideo screen.

Disc Format Error: This message is displayed ifa disc is inserted upside down, if the disc isnot readable, or if the disc format is notcompatible.

Disc Play Error: This message is displayed if themechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched ordamaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message is displayed ifthe region code of the DVD is not compatiblewith the region code of the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message is displayed ifthe disc is not properly loaded or ejected.

No Disc: This message is displayed when you tryto play or eject a disc that is not in the player.

X: A white X is displayed, in the upper left cornerof the video screen, if the operation that hasbeen selected is not currently available.

324

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with video distortionwhen operating cellular phones, scanners, CBradios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-wayradios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate andbuttons, use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen, asdamage may result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Option A, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of rear seat audio(RSA) system, if it has this feature, it will allowrear seat passengers to listen to and control any ofthe following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, frontCD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped). However, the rear seat passengerscan only control the sources that the front seatpassengers are not listening to. For example, rearseat passengers may listen to a CD in the frontradio and control it while the driver listens tothe radio through the front speakers. The rear seatpassengers have control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The front seat audio controls always have priorityover the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch the source for the main radio toa remote source, the RSA will not be able tocontrol the remote source. You can operate theRSA when the main radio is off.

325

The DVD or auxiliary device will always beavailable on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wirelessheadphones. All other RSA sources are availableon CHB or CH2 of the wireless headphones,as well as the wired headphones. If the RSA isoff, the wired headphones will provide DVDor auxiliary device audio. The rear seatpassengers will not be able to listen to XM, onCHB or CH2, if the front passenger is listening toa DVD or auxiliary device.

The remote control will not operate any of theRSA features.

RSAO (Power): Press this button to turn theRSA system on or off. RSA CHB or RSA CH2 willappear on the display when the system is on toindicate the channel to receive audio for thewireless headphones. Pressing this button will alsosilence the rear speakers.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Theselected radio station will appear on the display.If the front passengers are listening to theradio, the RSA will not switch between the bandsand cannot change the station.

tr /[u (Tune): When listening to theradio, press the right or the left arrow to go to thenext or the previous station and stay there.This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to goto the start of the current track or to the previoustrack. Press the right arrow to go to the nexttrack on the CD. This function is inactive if the frontseat passengers are listening to a CD.

326

PROG (Program): Press this button to select thenext preset station stored on the radio. Eachpress of this button will take you to the next presetstation. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

When a CD is playing in the single CD player,press this button to select the next track.This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to select the next CD, ifmultiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween playing the AM/FM tuner, front CD player,and XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped).If one of the sources are not loaded, the systemwill skip over the source when this button ispressed.

X (Headphone): Press the right or the leftheadphone button to enable volume control of thewired headphone connected to the correspondingjack. Press the right and left arrow buttons tochange the volume.

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.Press this button while using RSA, or when aDVD or CD is playing to blank the video screenand to mute the audio. The power indicatorlights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on theparental control will also disable all other buttonoperations from the remote control and theDVD player, except for the eject button. Press thisbutton again to restore operation of the RSA,DVD player, and remote control.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume play ifthe vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. Ifno disc is in the player then the system will powerup in auxiliary mode.

327

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Option B, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of rear seat audio(RSA) system, if it has this feature, it will allowrear seat passengers to listen to and control any ofthe following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, frontCD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped). However, the rear seat passengerscan only control the sources that the front seatpassengers are not listening to. For example, rearseat passengers may listen to a CD in the frontradio and control it while the driver listens tothe radio through the front speakers. The rear seatpassengers have control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The front seat audio controls always have priorityover the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch the source for the main radio toa remote source, the RSA will not be able tocontrol the remote source. You can operate theRSA when the main radio is off.

The DVD or auxiliary device will always be availableon channel (CHA or CH1) of the wirelessheadphones. All other RSA sources are available

on channel (CHB or CH2) of the wirelessheadphones, as well as the wired headphones. Ifthe RSA is off, the wired headphones will provideDVD or auxiliary device audio. The rear seatpassengers will not be able to listen to XM, onchannel (CHB or CH2), if the front passenger islistening to a DVD or auxiliary device.The remote control will not operate any of theRSA features.

RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press thisbutton to turn on the RSA system. Press thisbutton to switch between playing the AM, FM1,FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one of thesources is not loaded, the system will skipover the source when this button is pressed. Holdthis button down to turn off RSA.

328

Q, R, q, r, (Directional Arrows): UpArrow – Press this button while in AM/FM tuner,or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to switchbetween the station presets. Press this buttonwhile sourcing the single CD player to go to thenext track. Press this button while sourcingthe six-disc CD player to go to the next disc.

Down Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FMtuner to change the BAND from AM/FM tunerto the front CD player or to the XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Left Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FMtuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service toseek down. Press this button while sourcing thesingle CD player, or the six-disc CD player to go tothe previous track.

Right Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FMtuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to seekup. Press this button while sourcing the singleCD player, or the six-disc CD player to go to thenext track.

43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press thisbutton to select the correct headphone. Then pressthe left or right arrow buttons to increase ordecrease the headphone volume.

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen next to the auxiliaryand headphone jacks. Press this button whileusing RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playingto blank the video screen and to mute the audio.The power indicator lights on the DVD playerwill flash. Turning on the parental control will alsodisable all other button operations from theremote control and the DVD player, except for theeject button. Press this button again to restoreoperation of the RSA, DVD player, and remotecontrol.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume play ifthe vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. Ifno disc is in the player then the system will powerup in auxiliary mode.

329

Mobile Digital Media System

GM Mobile Digital Media SystemYour vehicle may have the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system which is made up of a digital mediaplayer, a wireless game controller, the digitalmedia storage (DMS) cartridge, the USB 2.0 cradle(docking station), and the PhatNoise™ MediaManager software.

See the following information to learn more aboutthe components that make up the completeDigital Media system.

Digital Media Player

The digital media playeris contained in anoverhead console. It isattached to thevehicle’s overhead railsystem, locatedbehind the second rowdomelamp.

The overhead console has an opening that opensdownward and is used to insert or remove theDMS cartridge. Pull the panel down to insert theremovable cartridge. Close this panel to completelyhide the cartridge inside the console.

With the DMS cartridge inserted, the digital mediaplayer is capable of playing back all of the contentthat has been stored on the cartridge. Audio contentis accessible through the radio and steering wheelcontrols. Audio, videos, and games are accessiblethrough the rear seat video screen.

330

Wireless Game Controller

Most of the functions onthe game controller willvary, depending onthe game being played.

The wireless game controller will allow the rearseat passengers to interact with the video gamesbeing played. While playing a game, press thebuttons on the controller to send commands to thegame being played.

DMS (Digital Media Storage) Cartridge

The DMS cartridge is apalm-sized 40GBportable hard drive.

This type of cartridge should allow for storageof up to 5,000 songs in MP3 format, or up to15 typical movies in MPEG format, and hours ofgame collections, or any combination of the three.

331

USB 2.0 Cradle

This type of cradle isthe docking station forthe DMS cartridge.

The USB 2.0 cradle is the docking station thatconnects the DMS cartridge to the home computerallowing new content to be added to the DMScartridge. When the cradle is connected tothe home computer, you can read from and writeto the DMS cartridge. The system is compatiblewith home computers that support USBcommunication (Microsoft® Windows 98 SR2 andhigher).

The USB 2.0 cradle is also backward compatiblefor computers equipped with USB 1.1.

PhatNoise™ Media Manager

The PhatNoise™ Media Manager (PMM) supportsthe in-vehicle GM Mobile Digital Media system.The PMM can be used to save audio CDs to theDMS cartridge as well as organize and transferexisting tracks on your PC, load video filesonto your DMS cartridge, purchase the preloadedvideos and games, and much more.

332

Quick Start GuideSelecting Your Mobile Digital Media as theActive SourceYour radio and rear seat entertainment systemcommunicate with the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, as one compact unit that can beaccessed by everyone seated inside the vehicle.The GM Mobile Digital Media system can holdthousands of songs, hours of videos, andhundreds of games.

To help use this system, see the following “QuickStart” information:

• Front seat driver and passenger, use the radioand steering wheel controls to access themusic collection with PhatNoise Voice Index™technology. The preset buttons can be usedto select the browsing category. The Next,Previous, and Seek buttons can be used tobrowse within a browsing category. Browse themusic collection by artist, album, genre, orcustom playlist as the system uses the voicemode to announce these selections. See“Using the GM Mobile Digital Media Systemfor Front Seat Audio Entertainment” laterin this manual.

• Rear seat passengers, use the wireless DVDremote control to navigate the menu displayedon the overhead DVD video screen, thenselect to play music, videos, or games.A dedicated game controller is included withthe Mobile Digital Media package. See“Using the GM Mobile Digital Media Systemfor Rear Seat Entertainment” later in thismanual.

Your vehicle may have audio steering wheelcontrols. Some audio controls can be adjusted atthe steering wheel. See Audio Steering WheelControls on page 353 in your owner manual.

If your vehicle has the OnStar®/Mute audiosteering wheel control, read the followinginstructions.

333

For vehicles with OnStar®:

• Press and hold the mute button to activateOnStar®.

• Press and release this button once againto deactivate OnStar® mode and go tomute mode.

• Press this button twice to return to sound fromthe GM Mobile Digital Media system.

For vehicles without OnStar®:

• Press the mute button to silence the system,press and release this button once again toturn the sound back on.

Using GM Mobile Digital Media Systemfor Front Seat Audio Entertainment

A. AlbumB. ArtistC. Genre

D. PlaylistE. Mode ItemsF. Tracks

334

The GM Mobile Digital Media is controlled throughthe radio and steering wheel controls on yourvehicle’s audio system. This system functionsdifferently than a typical CD changer. The DigitalMedia system allows you to switch betweendifferent playback modes. These modes determinethe next song that will play. Using modes, youcan browse through playlists, artists, albums, andgenres while the system reads Voice Index™names to you while you drive. By selecting PlaylistMode, you can access the music collection inthe order placed onto the DMS cartridge, or youcan have the system sort the music by Album,Artist, or Genre by selecting the correspondingModes.

Starting the System for Front SeatEntertainmentThe GM Mobile Digital Media system is availablethrough the DMS mode of your radio. Thissystem will power on and off automatically andresume where the system last stopped.

To begin playback, follow the instructions listedbelow:

1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM MobileDigital Media player.

2. Turn on your radio and switch to the DMSmode by pressing the CD/AUX button onyour radio.

3. Press any of the first four pushbuttons (A-D)to select different browse modes.

4. Press the left or right SEEK/SCAN arrow (E)to navigate through the mode items.

5. Turn the tune knob (F) to navigate throughsongs in a song list.

335

Modes OverviewThe numbered preset buttons one through fourare used to change the order tracks are groupedand played. For example, in artist mode, alltracks are grouped by artist names. Artist namesare listed alphabetically.

The SEEK/SCAN arrows are used to change themode item. For example, in Album Mode this willchange to the next or previous album. The mode listname will display for five seconds, time-out, thenupdate to show which list the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system is currently playing.The tune knob is used to change the song withinthe current category. For example, while in aplaylist (Playlist Mode) turning the tune knob tothe right will change from track 1 to track 2.

t SEEK/SCAN u: Once a mode has been set,navigate through the categories within that modeby pressing the right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow.The category items will display for five seconds,time-out, then update to show which category theDigital Media system is currently playing.

To change the song that is currently playing, pressthe right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow to navigatethrough the songs.

Setting the Browse Mode Using VoiceIndex™The system automatically organizes all of thesongs on the DMS (digital media storage)cartridge for you. With Voice Index™ browsing,the six numbered pushbuttons are used as modebuttons to browse as the system reads album,artist, genre and playlist names to you whileyou drive.

1-6 (Pushbuttons): The GM Digital Media systemuses the numbered station preset buttons toswitch through the browse modes. Press one ofthe pushbuttons to set the browse mode. Theselected browse mode will be announced and thebrowse mode name will appear on the display.

The preset pushbuttons and the modes associatedwith those numbers are:

• (1) Album

• (2) Artist

• (3) Genre

• (4) Playlist

• (5) Not Used

• (6) Not Used

336

Changing Song Lists Within aBrowse ModeEach browse mode contains lists of songs. Forexample, Genre mode might contain a list ofClassical songs, a list of Rock songs, and a list ofCountry songs.

Once the audio system is set to one of thefour modes, press the SEEK/SCAN button tonavigate through the song lists. For example,press the right arrow while in Album modeto change to the next album. Press the left arrowto go back to the previous Album item.

t SEEK/SCAN u: Press the SEEK/SCANbutton once to change to the next song list.

Mode 1 (Album Mode): Press the (1) pushbuttonto put the system into Album mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change tothe next or previous Album. Albums are listedalphabetically in groups of Artists.

Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Press the (2) pushbuttonto put the system into Artist mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change tothe next or previous Artist. Artists are listed inalphabetical order.

Mode 3 (Genre Mode): Press the (3) pushbuttonto put the system into Genre mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change tothe next or previous Genre in alphabeticalorder.

Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Press the (4) pushbuttonto put the system into Playlist mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change tothe next or previous Playlist in the order theplaylists were saved to the DMS cartridge.

The Album, Artist, and Genre lists are generatedand organized automatically using thePhatnoise™ Media Manager.

Seeking Through Song List Titles

t SEEK/SCAN u: Press and hold theSEEK/SCAN button for more than 2 seconds tostart seeking through song list titles. Pressthis button again to stop on a song list title.

The Digital Media system will announce thefollowing in each mode:

Mode 1 (Album Mode): Album names areannounced.

337

Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Artist names areannounced. Press and hold the SEEK/SCANbutton until the system announces the first letter ofeach artist name.

Mode 3 (Genre Mode): The first letter of Artistnames are announced in alphabetical order. Pressand hold the SEEK/SEEK button until the systemannounces the first letter of each artist name.

Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Seeking through songsis not available in Playlist Mode.

Finding Songs in a Song ListAfter finding a playlist, artist, album, or genre,navigate through the songs by turning thetune knob.

Using the Fast Forward and Fast ReverseButtons

{| (Fast Forward/Fast Reverse): Press andhold the fast forward or fast reverse arrow tofast forward or reverse within the current track.

Using the GM Mobile Digital MediaSystem for Rear Seat Entertainment

Rear seat passengerscan enjoy audio, videoand games over thewireless headphones.

Access to the Audio, Video, and Games on themenu system is displayed on the video screen.The DVD remote control and the controls on theDVD player itself can be used to make theselections.

Overhead Video Screen

338

Starting the System for Rear SeatEntertainmentThe GM Mobile Digital Media system is availablethrough the auxiliary mode of the DVD player.

To begin using the system, follow the instructionlist below:

1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM MobileDigital Media player.

2. Turn on your video screen by pressing thepower button.

3. Switch to the DMS mode by pressing theAUX button.

Navigating the On-Screen Menus Usingthe DVD Remote ControlThe on-screen menus provide access to theAudio, Video, and Game content on your digitalmedia storage (DMS) cartridge. Use the DVDremote control to navigate the on-screen menus.

A. Up ListB. Top MenuC. LeftD. Down List

E. SelectF. OptionsG. RightH. Return to Current Selection

n, q, p, o (Up List, Down List, Right, andLeft Directional Arrows): For the GM MobileDigital Media system, press the up list or down listdirectional arrows (A, D) to move the highlightarea up or down the list of items.

Press the right directional arrow (G) to go furtherinto the selected item, or press the left directionalarrow (C) to go back one menu level.

339

r (Enter/Select): For the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, press the enter/select button (E) togo into any selected menu item.

v (Title/Top Menu): For the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, press the title/top menu button (B)to jump to the start screen.

q (Return/Current Selection): For theGM Mobile Digital Media system, if audio is playingor in the pause mode, press the return/currentselection button (H) to go back to the currentselection.

y (Menu/Options): For the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, press the menu/options button (F)to display the options list.

c (Stop): For the GM Mobile Digital Mediasystem, press this button to stop playback of theselected option.

r /j (Play/Pause): For the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, press this button to start playback ofa selected option. Press this button while an optionis in the play mode to pause it. Press it again tocontinue playback of the current option.

DVD Remote Control BatteriesIf the remote control does not seem to be working,the batteries may need to be replaced. SeeRemote Control, “Battery Replacement” in yourvehicle’s owner manual.

Browsing Audio

1. Select the Audio option through the menusystem displayed on the video screen.

340

2. Press the up list or down list directionalarrows (A, D) on the remote control tonavigate through the menu options such asalbum, artist, playlist or genre. See “Navigatingthe On-Screen Menus Using the DVDRemote Control” earlier in this section formore information.

3. Press the select button (E) on the remotecontrol to begin playing an album, artist,genre, playlist, or song. See “Navigating theOn-Screen Menus Using the DVD RemoteControl” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

341

4. If you want to find a particular song, press theright directional arrow (G) on the remotecontrol to go further into the selected item.See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Usingthe DVD Remote Control” earlier in thissection for more information.

Video BrowsingBrowse digital videos stored on the systemthrough the menu display. MPEG format issupported, so you can play back recorded showsand movies from television, home movies,downloaded videos and pre-packaged featurefilms and shows. See the following instructions forfurther screen display information:

1. Select the Video option through the menusystem displayed on the video screen.

342

2. Press the up list or down list directionalarrows (A, D) on the remote control tonavigate through preloaded videos andunlocked video playlists. See “Navigating theOn-Screen Menus Using the DVD RemoteControl” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

3. If you want to find a particular video, pressthe right directional arrow (G) on the remotecontrol to go further into the selected item.See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Usingthe DVD Remote Control” earlier in thissection for more information.

343

Games BrowsingBrowse games that are stored on the systemthrough the menu display. Video games arepreloaded on the DMS cartridge and played withrich screen graphics and the included wirelessgame controller.

1. Select the Games option through the menusystem displayed on the video screen.

2. Press the up list or down list directionalarrows (A, D) on the remote control tonavigate through the preloaded gamepackages. Game packages can be purchasedand unlocked from your desktop computer.See the PhatNoise™ Media Manager Owner’sManual for more information on how tounlock games.

344

Wireless Game Controller

A. Start ButtonB. Start LightC. Select ButtonD. Select Light

E. Left ThumbstickF. Left RockerpadG. Right Thumbstick

345

The wireless game controller transmits radiofrequency signals to the overhead monitor.Wireless means, there are no cords to hinder yourmovement while playing games.

The key pad as shown above has six buttonslocated on the upper right side of the gamecontroller.

Wireless Game Controller SynchronizationIn the event that your GM Mobile Digital Mediagame controller needs to be re-synchronized withyour vehicle, open the battery compartmentand remove a battery. As soon as the battery isreplaced, the game controller will synchronize withthe vehicle during the next ignition cycle.

Wireless Game Controller Play ModeThe functionality of your GM Mobile Digital MediaGame Controller is dependant upon the gamebeing played. In cases where there are two playeroptions for a game, you may desire to have asecond controller in your vehicle which maybe purchased through your retailer.

Wireless Game Controller PowerSaving ModeYour GM Mobile Digital Media Game Controllerhas a built-in power saving mode to conservebattery life. When not in use, the game controllerwill automatically go into “Sleep” mode. Thegame controller can be awakened at any time bypressing the “Start” button.

Important Safety and HandlingInstructionsThis equipment has been tested and found tocomply with the limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limitsare designed to provide reasonable protectionagainst harmful interference in a residentialinstallation. This equipment may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications, if it is notinstalled and used in accordance with theinstructions provided. However, there is noguarantee that interference will not occur in aparticular installation. If this equipment does causeharmful interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipmentoff and on, consult the retailer for help.

346

This device also complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



Changes and modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Read the following for instructions on handling andtaking care of your Mobile Digital Media systemand its components.

Digital Media Storage (DMS) Cartridge Care• Do not leave the DMS cartridge in locations

with extremely high temperatures such ason a car dashboard or in the rear windowwhere it will be subject to direct sunlight.

• Do not drop the DMS cartridge or subject it toa violent shock.

• Do not spill liquid on the DMS cartridge orsubmerge the DMS cartridge in liquid. Theonly effective protection for data andother material stored on the DMS cartridge isthe regular backing up of that data by you.

347

Mobile Digital Media Player Care• Never spray any type of liquid such as a

cleaning agent inside of an open cartridgepanel on the Digital Media player. Doing thismay damage the parts or inside mechanismneeded to help operate the unit.

• Do not use any object to probe the opening ofthe Mobile Digital Media player and do not putany body parts or other foreign objects inthe opening of the product.

Tips and Troubleshooting ChartProblem Cause and Solution

The Digital Media system and RSE system will notcome on at all.

• A fuse in the car has blown. After checking forshort circuits in the wires, replace the fuse withone of the same rating.

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA NOTINSERTED.

• The DMS cartridge is not fully inserted. Fullyinsert the DMS cartridge.

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA LOADING. • The system is still booting. Please wait up to15 seconds for the system to boot and thenswitch back to digital media mode.

348

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)Problem Cause and Solution

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA ERROR. • The DMS cartridge is not operating properly oris damaged. See your retailer if the problempersists.

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA FILE ERROR. • A file on your DMS cartridge is corrupted andwill not play properly. Run the PhatNoise DMSDoctor on your computer and follow therecommendations.

The green light blinks at a steady rate for longer than20 seconds.

• You have updated the firmware on the DMScartridge and the Mobile Digital Media systemis reprogramming itself. DO NOT REMOVETHE DMS CARTRIDGE. Allow the DigitalMedia system to reprogram itself for up to 10minutes. When reprogramming is complete, thelights will turn off and stay off. The system willbe ready to use.

349


No Sound. • Adjust the volume of the head unit.• Make sure the head unit has the Digital Media

player as the active source.

No Sound.The head unit cannot access the Digital Media system.

• File(s) on your cartridge may be corrupt. Runthe PhatNoise DMS Doctor on your computerand follow the recommendations.

• If you have just downloaded new firmware, thisis normal. Wait about seven minutes until thegreen light stops blinking, then both lightsshould go off.

350


Audio skipping occurs during playback. Many things can cause a “skip”, or any break duringplayback. If you are hearing breaks in playback, hereare some things to check:• When you hear a skip, restart the track, or

seek backwards a bit, to hear if the skip isactually in the music file.

• Check to see if you are using the latestfirmware and desktop software. This is veryimportant, as software is updated frequently.See PhatNoise Music Manager manual.

• Sometimes a heavily fragmented cartridge canskip due to increased seek times. Defragmentthe cartridge for best performance. SeePhatNoise Media Manager™ softwareinstructions for defragmenting a cartridge.

WMA files are not playing in the Mobile Digital Mediasystem.

Some software such as Windows Media Player featurescopy protection in their WMA encoding tools. Thisprevents the tracks from playing on any device otherthan your computer. Disable any “Copy Protect Music”check box when encoding music. Consult yoursoftware’s manual for more information.

351


Voice prompts are missing in the vehicle. Check your voice prompt settings on your desktopcomputer:• Insert the DMS.• Open the Device view and select the DMS.• Press the Hardware Options button.• Open the DMS Database/Voice Prompts tab

and click Fix Voice Prompts.

Customer Assistance CenterFor customer assistance in the United States, call1-877-GM-PHATN (877-467-4286) or contactthe Customer Assistance Center throughthe internet at gmmobilemediasupportgedas.com

For customer assistance in Canada, see theCustomer Assistance Offices in the index of yourvehicle’s owner manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

352

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

wt u x (Seek): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous station andstay there.To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appearson the display. The radio will go to a station, playfor a few seconds, then go to the next station.Press either arrow again to stop scanning.The sound will mute while seeking or scanning.The radio will only seek or scan stations witha strong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press either arrow togo to the previous or next track, if more thaneight seconds have played. If either arrow is held orpressed more than once, the player will continuemoving backward or forward through the CD.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations thatare programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.The radio will go to the next preset stationstored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next preset station. Press thisbutton again to stop scanning. The radio willonly scan preset stations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

$ (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again, to turn the sound on.

r (Play): When listening to the radio, press thisbutton to play a CD.

wux (Volume): Press the up or down arrowto increase or decrease the volume.

353

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

354

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base located on thehood of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

355

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehiclecan interfere with the performance of the XM™system. Make sure that the XM™ satellite antennais not obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume level willchange from the normal level to loud, andLOUD will appear on the radio display. To changeback to the default or normal setting, press andhold pushbutton 6 again. The volume levelwill change from the loud level to normal, andNORMAL will appear on the radio display.Removing the radio and not replacing it with afactory radio or chime module will disable vehiclechimes.

356

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 358Defensive Driving ...................................... 358Drunken Driving ........................................ 359Control of a Vehicle .................................. 362Braking ...................................................... 362Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 363Braking in Emergencies ............................. 365Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 365StabiliTrak® System ................................... 367Steering .................................................... 369Off-Road Recovery .................................... 372Passing ..................................................... 372Loss of Control .......................................... 374Driving at Night ......................................... 375Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 376

City Driving ............................................... 380Freeway Driving ........................................ 381Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 382Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 383Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 384Winter Driving ........................................... 386If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 390Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 391Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 391

Towing ........................................................ 396Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 396Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 396Level Control ............................................. 398Towing a Trailer ........................................ 398

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

357

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about drivingis: Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety devicein your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 32.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

358

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

359

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with aBAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

360

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

361

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They arethe brakes, the steering, and the accelerator.All three systems have to do their work atthe places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 365 andStabiliTrak® System on page 367.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 412.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 226.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

362

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this test isgoing on, and you may even notice that your brakepedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 227.

363

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

364

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you willnot have time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. The system operates if itsenses that one or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message willcome on in the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the traction control system is limiting wheelspin. You may feel or hear the system working,but this is normal.

365

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control.

This warning light willcome on to let youknow if there isa problem with yourtraction control system.

When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

If the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message inthe DIC comes on and stays on or comes onwhile you are driving, there’s a problem with yourtraction control system. Have the tractioncontrol system serviced by your Saturn retailer assoon as possible.

When this warning message is on, the TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message in the DIC will comeon to remind you that the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. See RockingYour Vehicle to Get It Out on page 391 and If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 390.

To turn the system off,press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the center ofthe instrument panel.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when youpress the button, the TRACTION CONTROLACTIVE message will go off, but the system willnot turn off until there is no longer a currentneed to limit wheel spin. The TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message will come on to remindyou the system is off.

366

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The traction controlsystem warning message should go off.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 412 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak® whichcombines anti-lock brake, traction and stabilitycontrol systems and helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in most drivingconditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin todrive away, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to insure there are no problems. Youmay hear or feel the system working. Thisis normal and does not mean there is a problemwith your vehicle.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theSERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

If the vehicle has gone through heavy accelerationor braking or multiple turns during the first two milesof driving after starting your vehicle, the STABILITYCONTROL OFF message may appear on the DIC.If this is the case, your vehicle does not needservicing. You will need to turn the vehicle off andthen restart it to initialize StabiliTrak®. If eithermessage appears on the DIC, and your vehicle hasnot gone through hard acceleration, braking ormultiple turns in the first two miles of driving, yourvehicle should be taken in for service.

The STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message willappear on the DIC only when the system isboth on and activated. It means that an advancedcomputer-controlled system has come on tohelp your vehicle continue to go in the direction inwhich you are steering. StabiliTrak® activateswhen the computer senses that your vehicle is juststarting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch ofice or other slippery spot on the road. Whenthe system activates, you may hear a noise or feela vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.

367

When the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEmessage is on, you should continue to steer in thedirection you want to go. The system is designedto help you in bad weather or other difficult drivingsituations by making the most of whatever roadconditions will permit. For more information on thestability messages, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 234.

If the StabiliTrak® system turns off, the tractioncontrol system warning light will illuminate, andthe STABILITY CONTROL OFF messagewill appear on the DIC to warn the driver thatStabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist youwith directional control of the vehicle. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

To realize the full benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you should normally leaveStabiliTrak® on, but it may be necessary toturn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand,mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock” yourvehicle to attempt to free it. See RockingYour Vehicle to Get It Out on page 391 andIf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 390.

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of theStabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and by applyingbrakes.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle. It willactivate and display the TRACTION CONTROLACTIVE message in the DIC if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction while driving.

If the brake traction-control system activatesconstantly or if the brakes have heated up dueto high-speed braking, brake traction-control will bedisabled and the TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVEmessage will be displayed. In the limited mode,the traction control system will only use enginetraction-control and is limited in its ability to provideoptimal performance since the system will notutilize brake traction-control to control slip on thedrive wheels. The system will return to normaloperation after the brakes have cooled. This cantake up to two minutes or longer dependingon brake usage.

368

The traction control system may activate ondry or rough roads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of the transaxle. When thishappens you may notice a reduction inacceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEmessage will appear on the DIC and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. Whenroad conditions allow you to use cruise again,you may re-engage the cruise control. See CruiseControl on page 188.

StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your retailer forservice.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

369

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 365 and StabiliTrak® Systemon page 367.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


370

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 362. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

371

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

372

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

373

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts sayabout what happens when the three controlsystems — brakes, steering, andacceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

374

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reducethe glare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

375

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, orturn as well because your tire-to-road traction is notas good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do nothave much tread left, you will get even less traction.

376

It is always wise to go slower and be cautious ifrain starts to fall while you are driving. The surfacemay get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tunedfor driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiper andwasher system in good shape and keep yourwindshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washerfluid. Replace your windshield wiper insertswhen they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubberstart to separate from the inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until your brakes worknormally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,try to slow down before you hit them.

377

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

378

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not

just your parking lamps — to help makeyou more visible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especiallycareful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself more clear room ahead, andbe prepared to have your view restrictedby road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 462.

379

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 381.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

380

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

381

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts at Saturn retailers all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

382

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

383

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

384

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

385

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 462.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, orgrip, and will need to be very careful.

386

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have a traction system, it will improve yourability to accelerate when driving on a slipperyroad. But you can turn the traction system off if youever need to. You should turn the tractionsystem off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 390. Even ifyour vehicle has a traction system, you willwant to slow down and adjust your driving to theroad conditions. Under certain conditions, you maywant to turn the traction system off, such aswhen driving through deep snow and loose gravel,to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 365and StabiliTrak® System on page 367.

If you do not have a traction system, accelerategently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin andpolish the surface under the tires even more.

387

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 363.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumpsof trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

388

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so youmight not know it is in your vehicle.Clear away snow from around the baseof your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And checkaround again from time to time to be suresnow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the sideof the vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

389

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 391.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 480.

390

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you shouldturn the traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 365 andStabiliTrak® System on page 367. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheelsin the forward and reverse directions, you willcause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.If that does not get your vehicle out after afew tries, it may need to be towed out. If yourvehicle does need to be towed out, see TowingYour Vehicle on page 396.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

391

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of yourvehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find thelabel attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 462 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 469.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Example Label

392

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer on page 398 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

393




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’scapacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

394

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your retailer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theRating GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

395

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you haveto stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, theywill keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your retailer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 543.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing are known as“dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”(towing your vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on a device knowas a “dolly”).

396

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your retailer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 382.

Dinghy TowingYour vehicle was not designed to be towedwith all of its wheels on the ground. It can betowed with the two rear wheels on the ground.See “Dolly Towing” following for more information.

Dolly TowingTo dolly tow your vehicle, do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designedfor towing.

5. Release the parking brake.

397

Level ControlOn vehicles equipped with automatic level control,the rear of the vehicle is automatically keptlevel as you load or unload your vehicle. However,you should still not exceed the GVWR or theGAWR. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.

You may hear the compressor operating when youload or unload your vehicle, and periodically asthe system self-adjusts. This is normal. Thecompressor should operate for brief periods oftime. If the sound continues for an extended periodof time, your vehicle needs service.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your weightratings. Ask your retailer to help you loadyour vehicle the right way.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe steps in this section. Ask your retailerfor advice and information about towing atrailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costlyrepairs that would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always follow the instructions inthis section and check with your retailerfor more information about towing a trailerwith your vehicle.

398

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify thetrailering capacity of vehicle, you should readthe information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. Trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Traileringmeans changes in handling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has tobe used properly.

That is the reason for this section. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. The trailer also addsconsiderably to wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not onlywhere you live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can bestate or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle, or other parts could bedamaged.

• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, alower gear when towing a trailer. Operatingyour vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailerwill minimize heat buildup and extend thelife of your transaxle.

399

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• Weight of the trailer• Weight of the trailer tongue• Weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and how much yourvehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important.

It can also depend on any special equipment thatyou have on your vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” later in this section formore information.Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.Look in the following chart to find the maximumtrailer weight for your vehicle.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Two-Wheel-Drive 3.29 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)

Any vehicle without the V92 trailering package or heavy-duty cooling package is limited to a 2,000 lb (907 kg)trailer rating and a 7,000 lb (3 175 kg) GCWR.*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should notbe exceeded.

You can ask your retailer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at theaddress listed in your Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information Booklet.

In Canada, write to:General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Center, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

400

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengers,or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW because your vehiclewill be carrying that weight, too. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 391 for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight of 350 lbs (159 kg) for your vehicle.

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability tocarry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce your trailering capacity morethan the total of the additional weight.

401

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the frontaxle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), aRGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and aGCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greaterthan just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 timesas much. The weight at the rear axle couldbe 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the

total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,but within the limit for RGAWR as well. Thevehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equippedwith some of the latest options and you have afront seat passenger and two rear seat passengerswith some luggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to thefront axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rearaxle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits. Your maximumtrailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).You may go further and think you must limittongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you muststill consider the effect on the rear axle.

402

Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs(1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg)on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times theactual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongueweight is usually at least 10 percent of totalloaded trailer weight, you can expect that thelargest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You will find thesenumbers on the Certification/Tire label at the rearedge of the driver’s door or see Loading YourVehicle on page 391. Then be sure you do not goover the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and roughroads are a few reasons why you will needthe right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The bumpers on your vehicle are not intendedfor hitches. Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to them. Use only aframe-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?If you do, remember to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you do not sealthem, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 151. Dirt and water can, too.

403

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains and do not attach them tothe bumper. Always leave just enough slack soyou can turn with your rig. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes — andthey must be adequate. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakes so you willbe able to install, adjust, and maintain themproperly.

Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes,do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brakesystem. If you do, both brake systems will notwork well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open andyou pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness or death.See Engine Exhaust on page 151.To maximize your safety when towinga trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessaryrepairs before starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear-most windows closed.• If exhaust does come into your

vehicle through a window in the rearor another opening, drive with yourfront, main heating or cooling systemon and with the fan on any speed.


404


This will bring fresh, outside air intoyour vehicle. Do not use the climatecontrol setting for maximum airbecause it only recirculates the airinside your vehicle. See ClimateControl System on page 205 or DualClimate Control System on page 209.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are drivingis now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer movingand then apply the trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working. This lets youcheck your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, becauseyou are a good deal longer, you will need togo much farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

405

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to haveextra wiring.

The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It is important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

406

Driving on GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than1,000 lbs (450 kg), you may prefer to drive inTHIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) or, as you needto, a lower gear. This will minimize heat build-upand extend the life of your transaxle.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,do the following:1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift

into PARK (P).2. Have someone place chocks under the

trailer wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release

the regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then applyyour parking brake, and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

407

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you do the following:

• Start your engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system. Each of these iscovered in this manual, and the Index will helpyou find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is agood idea to review these sections before youstart your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle may have a trailer wiring harnesspackage located in the glove box. It can beconnected from the rear of your vehicle to yourtrailer. Contact your retailer for more information.

408

Service ........................................................ 412Accessories and Modifications ................... 412California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 413Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 413Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 414Fuel ............................................................. 414

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 414Gasoline Specifications .............................. 414California Fuel ........................................... 415Additives ................................................... 415Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 416Filling the Tank ......................................... 417Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 419

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 420Hood Release ........................................... 421Engine Compartment Overview .................. 422Engine Oil ................................................. 423Engine Oil Life System .............................. 426Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 428Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 430

Engine Coolant .......................................... 432Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 435Engine Overheating ................................... 435Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 437Cooling System ......................................... 438Power Steering Fluid ................................. 443Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 444Brakes ...................................................... 445Battery ...................................................... 449Jump Starting ............................................ 450

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 455Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 455Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ........... 456Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime

Running Lamps (DRL) ........................... 457Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 458License Plate Lamp ................................... 459Replacement Bulbs ................................... 460

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 460

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

409

Tires ............................................................ 462Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 463Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 466Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 469High-Speed Operation ............................... 471Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 472When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 473Buying New Tires ...................................... 474Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 476Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 477Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 478Wheel Replacement .................................. 478Tire Chains ............................................... 480Accessory Inflator ...................................... 480If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 483Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 484Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 485Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 488Secondary Latch System ........................... 495Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 497Compact Spare Tire .................................. 500

Appearance Care ........................................ 501Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 501Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 502Leather ...................................................... 503Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 504Care of Safety Belts .................................. 504Weatherstrips ............................................ 504Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 505Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 505Finish Care ............................................... 505Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ......................................... 506Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 507Tires ......................................................... 507Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 508Finish Damage .......................................... 508Underbody Maintenance ............................ 508Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 508Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 509


410

Vehicle Identification .................................. 510Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 510Service Parts Identification Label ............... 510

Electrical System ........................................ 511Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 511Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 511Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 511

Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 511

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 512Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 512Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 514

Capacities and Specifications .................... 518


411

ServiceYour Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best andwants you to be happy with it. We hope youwill go to your retailer for all your service needs.You will get genuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicleall Saturn.

Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-Saturn accessories to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissionssystems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronicsystems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of these accessoriesmay even cause malfunction or damage notcovered by warranty.

Saturn accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on yourvehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.When you go to your Saturn retailer and askfor Saturn accessories, you will know thatSaturn-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine Saturnaccessories.

412

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 553.

413

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 99.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 534.

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your retailer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, Saturn recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). Saturn recommends against the useof gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 415 for additional information.

414

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label. If thisfuel is not available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 229. If this occurs, return toyour authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

415

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buygasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. GeneralMotors recommends against the use of suchgasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce thelife of spark plugs and the performance of theemission control system may be affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized Saturn retailer forservice.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

416

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle withdual sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door willonly open partway.

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether.

417

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off oroverfill the tank and wait a few seconds afteryou have finished pumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 505.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 229.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedin the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuelcap is not properly installed. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 241 for more information.

418

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump orby notifying the station attendant. Leavethe area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damage yourfuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 229.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

419

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

420

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is locatedunder the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push theunderhood release to the right. It is locatednear the center of the hood, above the grille.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Pull up on the hood prop to release it from itsstorage clip.The hood prop may be hot due to increasedengine temperatures under the hood, sobe careful when handling it. Use your hoodprop sleeve when handling the hood prop.

5. Put the end of the hood prop into the slot inthe underside of the hood, on the driver’sside of the vehicle. It is marked by an arrow.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Lift the hood to relieve pressureon the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from theslot in the hood and return the prop to itsretainer. Then let the hood down and close itfirmly.

421

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.9L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

422

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 514.

B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 450.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 444.

D. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator PressureCap on page 435.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 443.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 423.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 423.

H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 430.

I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 445.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 428.

K. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 438.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 422for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

423

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you will need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 518.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 422 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

424

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

425

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol meet GM StandardGM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil change willbe indicated can vary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, you must reset the systemevery time the oil is changed.When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 241. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your retailerhas trained people who will perform this work usinggenuine Saturn parts and reset the system. It isalso important to check your oil regularly and keepit at the proper level.

426

If the system is ever reset accidentally, youmust change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engineoff, repeatedly push the set/reset button untilOIL is displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold theset/reset button for five seconds. Thenumber will disappear and be replacedby 100 (indicating 100% oil life remaining).

3. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourretailer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.

427

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 422for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 522 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required. Do not usecompressed air to clean the filter.

428

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two clamps on the duct.

2. Remove the duct.

3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine aircleaner/filter housing.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of thepanel with the slots at the bottom of thehousing.

6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place.If the panel moves easily, check that the tabsare seated correctly in the slots.

7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

429

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 524, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 530.

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult,you may choose to have this done at theyour retailer’s service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

430

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow thesesteps:

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.The automatic transaxle dipstick is locatedtoward the back of the engine compartment,near the brake master cylinder reservoir.The dipstick handle is a red loop. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 422 formore information on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait threeseconds, and then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecross-hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 530.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 530.

431

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you have aproblem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 435.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning messages and gages workas they should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

432

What Engine Coolant to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four timesa year, have your retailer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 530 for more information.

433

Checking Coolant

The coolant recoverytank is located on thedriver’s side of thevehicle, abovethe engine aircleaner/filter. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 422for more informationon location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe full cold mark, or a little higher. When yourengine is warm, the level should be above the fullcold mark or a little higher. The full cold markis a line with an arrow pointing down at it, locatedon the front of the coolant recovery tank.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator. Neverturn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

434

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 438.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicleis a pressure-type cap and must be tightlyinstalled to prevent coolant loss and possibleengine damage from overheating. Be surethe cap is properly closed.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 422for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gageon your vehicle’s instrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 228.

Your vehicle may also have an ENGINECOOLANT HOT message displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 241.

435

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just openthe hood. Stay away from the engine ifyou see or hear steam coming from it.Turn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 437 forinformation on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 437 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

436

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear whiledriving — DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the enginefor three minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until it cools down.Also, see “Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, youwill notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The temperature gage willindicate an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 423.

437

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood,here is what you will see:

A. RadiatorPressure Cap

B. Electric EngineCooling Fans

C. Engine CoolantRecovery Tank

D. Recovery tankFULL COLD mark

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above thefull cold mark. If it is not, you may have a leakat the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

438

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 437 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

439

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at or above the full cold mark,add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 432for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the proper coolantmixture. With plain water or the wrongmixture, your engine could get too hot butyou would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

440

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is ator above the full cold mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe cooling system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

441

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

1. You can remove theradiator pressurecap when thecooling system,including the radiatorpressure cap andupper radiator hose,is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left, closethe cap and wait for the system to cool down.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap. Remove thepressure cap.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 432for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

5. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fans.

6. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

442

7. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap is closed properly.

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the fullcold mark.

9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is locatedtoward the rear of theengine compartment onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 422for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

Filling the Coolant Recovery Tank

443

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewhere within thecross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid isat the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 530.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What Washer Fluid to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 422for reservoir location.

444

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 422 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well,or will not work at all.

445

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 226.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 530.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

446

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 505.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

447

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to Saturntorque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your retailer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality andwork well together if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. Your vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality Saturn brake parts.When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brakelinings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved Saturnreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakesmay no longer work properly. For example,if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between yourfront and rear brakes can change — for the worse.The braking performance you have come toexpect can change in many other ways if someoneputs in the wrong replacement brake parts.

448

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehiclefor 25 days or more, remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery. This willhelp keep your battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 450 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

449

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

On vehicles equipped with the optional powersliding door, a low-voltage battery or replacinga battery may cause the system to becomeinoperative. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)on page 121 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

450

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on each vehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump starting terminal forthat purpose.

451

The terminal is locatedunder the fuse blockcover. Removethe cover to accessthe remote positive (+)terminal.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 422 for more information on the locationof the remote positive (+) terminal. Youshould always use the remote positive (+)terminal instead of the positive (+) terminalon your battery.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle.But if a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

452

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+)to negative (−) or you will get a short thatwould damage the battery and maybe otherparts too. Do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

453

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connectionis just as good there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to the battery ismuch less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminaland Remote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

454

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable fromthe other vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminalcover or underhood fuse block cover toits original position.

Bulb ReplacementFor the type of bulb to use, see ReplacementBulbs on page 460.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

455

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps

A. High-beam HeadlampB. Low-beam HeadlampC. Sidemarker Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 421 for more information.

2. Remove the headlamp retainer pin (A) byturning it towards the headlamp assemblyand pulling it straight out.

456

3. Remove the screw (B) from the top of theheadlamp assembly.

4. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.

5. Disconnect the socket wiring harnessconnector from the headlamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove from the assembly.

7. To replace a headlamp bulb, disconnectthe bulb socket wiring harness and connectto the new bulb socket.To replace a sidemarker bulb, pull the oldbulb out and push a new bulb in.

8. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting intothe bulb assembly and turning it clockwiseto secure.

9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlampassembly.

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)

To replace one of these bulbs (A), do the following:

1. Follow the Steps 1 through 4 to remove theheadlamp assembly. See Headlamps andSidemarker Lamps on page 456 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove from the assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb out from the bulb socket.

4. Replace with a new bulb

457

5. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting intothe bulb assembly and turning it clockwiseto secure.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlampassembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo change a stoplamp/taillamp, turn signal orback-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 128for more information.

2. Remove the twoscrews from thetaillamp housing onthe inboard side.

3. Pull out the taillamp housing.

4. Disconnect the wiring harness connectorfrom the taillamp assembly.

A. Stoplamp/TaillampB. Turn Signal LampC. Back-up Lamp Bulb

458

5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwiseto remove.

6. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulbout of the socket and gently pushing ina new bulb.

7. Replace the bulb socket by inserting andturning clockwise to secure.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly byinserting the outboard locating/retainingpins until the lamp is seated.

9. Secure with the inboard screws.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each ofthe license plate lamps to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

license plate lamp.

459

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up 3057KX

Front Turn Signal, DRLand Parking 3157NAK

High-Beam and Low-BeamHeadlamps H11

License Plate Lamp 168

Sidemarker 194

Stoplamp, Taillamp andTurn Signal 3057KX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour retailer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 522 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 532.

460

To replace the windshield wiper blade assemblydo the following:

1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it isfacing away from the windshield.

2. Squeeze the tabs (B) on each side of thewiper blade assembly to remove the wiperarm (A) from the blade (C).

Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damagethat occurs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not allow the wiper blade armto touch the windshield.

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the tabs on eachside of the wiper blade assembly clickinto place.

To replace the rear wiper blade, follow thesteps listed above.

461

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your Saturn Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 391.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 469.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

462

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

463

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 477.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 500 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 483.

Compact Spare Tire Example

464

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tireor compact spare tire should be inflated to60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tirepressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 469.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspectratio, construction type, and service description.The letter T as the first character in the tiresize means the tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

465

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carrya load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

466

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 469.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 391.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

467

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 391.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 469 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 391.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 473.

468

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 477.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 391.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

469

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below thedriver’s door latch. This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressures for your tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,shown on the label, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to support your vehicle’smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 391. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 500.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

470

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have acrash and you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that a vehiclecan be driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speed operation,in excellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If your vehicle has P225/60R17 size tires,they will require inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving your vehicle at speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set the coldinflation pressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall, or38 psi (262 kPa), whichever is lower. See theexample following. When you end this high-speeddriving, return the tires to the cold tire inflationpressure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 391 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 469.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set theinflation pressure for high-speed driving at38 psi (262 kPa).

471

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 473and Wheel Replacement on page 478 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 522.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 518.

472

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel todo this; but be sure to use a scraper orwire brush later, if needed, to get all therust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 484.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

473

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by anMS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 463 for additional information.

474

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle maynot handle properly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and type of tires onall wheels. It is all right to drive withyour compact spare temporarily, as itwas developed for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 500.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires withthose that do not have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type (radialand bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’soriginal tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

475

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chance thatyou will crash and suffer serious injury.Only use Saturn specific wheel and tiresystems developed for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by a Saturncertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 474 andAccessories and Modifications on page 412 foradditional information.

476

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

477

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your retailer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.

478

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them onlywith new Saturn original equipment parts. Thisway, you will be sure to have the right wheel,wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 484 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newSaturn original equipment wheel.

479

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes, suspension orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device onlyif its manufacturer recommends it foruse on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or remove the deviceif it is contacting your vehicle, and donot spin your vehicle’s wheels. If youdo find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Accessory InflatorYour vehicle may have an accessory inflator. Withit, you can inflate things like air mattresses andbasketballs, and you can also use it to bring yourtires up to the proper pressure.

The accessory inflator is located in the rearcompartment on the driver’s side. To access theaccessory inflator, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 128for more information.

2. Lift the lever to move the third row rearseatback forward. See Third Row Seaton page 27 for more information.

3. Remove the cover by pulling the lever up.

480

This symbol is onthe accessoryinflator switch.

There may be an accessory inflator kit storedin the rear compartment on the passenger’sside. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with anair pressure gage and nozzle adapters.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate any object onlyto its recommended pressure.

To use your accessory inflator system, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, ifrequired, to the end of the hose that hasthe pressure gage.

3. Attach that end of the hose to the object youwish to inflate.

4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet.

5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.

6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The lightin the switch will come on to show thesystem is working.

481

If the accessory inflator system does not turn onor the light does not come on, the fuse maybe blown or installed incorrectly. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 512 or see yourretailer for service.

Your accessory inflator will automatically shut offafter about 10 minutes. The light in the switchwill blink. After about one minute you can use thesystem again. Press the switch and the indicatorlight will come on.

Notice: If you run the accessory inflatorlonger than 30 minutes at a time, you coulddamage the inflator. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Run the inflatorfor short periods of time only.

After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes,wait at least 10 minutes before restarting theaccessory inflator.

To turn off the inflator, do the following:

1. Press the switch and detach the hose, firstfrom the inflated object, then from the outlet.

2. Put the protective cap back on.

3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, andstore in the rear compartment on thepassenger’s side.

To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at thebottom of the cover and put it in place. Push downthe tab to secure the cover.

482

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

483

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place.Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 182for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

484

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The tools needed to remove the spare tire arelocated in the storage compartment at the rear ofthe vehicle, on the passenger’s side.

To remove the tools, do the following:1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 128

for more information.2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle

has one.

485

3. Open the jack storage compartment by liftingthe tab and pulling the cover off.

A. JackB. StrapC. Bracket

D. Wing NutE. Bag and Tools

4. Remove the jack (A) and jacking tools (E) byloosening and then removing the wing nut (D)and bracket (C).

5. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack andremove the jacking tools, including the foldingwrench and extension, from the pouch.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A),extension (B), and folding wrench (C).

The compact spare tire is located under therear of the vehicle. See Compact Spare Tireon page 500 for more information about thecompact spare.

486

To remove the compact spare tire, do the following:

A. Hoist ShaftB. Hoist AssemblyC. RetainerD. Compact Spare Tire

E. Extension(Chisel End)

F. Folding Wrench

1. Attach the folding wrench (F) to theextension (E) and insert the chisel end onan angle through the hole in the rear bumperand into the hoist shaft (A).

2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise tolower the compact spare tire (D) to theground. Continue to turn the wrench so thecompact spare tire can be pulled out fromunder the vehicle.

3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable toremove the compact spare tire, so it canbe pulled up through the wheel opening.The hoist is used to store a full-size or a flatroad tire under the vehicle. See Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 497for more information.

4. Remove the compact spare tire from the cable.

487

If the compact spare tire will not lower, checkunder the vehicle to see if the tire is hangingloose and the cable end and spring underthe wheel plate are missing. If so, the secondarylatch system is engaged. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 495.

To continue changing the flat tire, seeRemoving the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire on page 488.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYour vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so,you will see exposed stainless steel wheelnuts. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all of thewheel nuts. Do not remove them yet. Or, yourvehicle may have steel wheel covers. To removethe wheel covers and wheel nut caps, loosenthe plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in acounterclockwise direction. If needed, youcan finish loosening with your fingers. The plasticnut caps will not come off. Use the flat end ofthe wheel wrench and pry along the edge of thecover until it comes off. The edge of the wheelcover could be sharp, so do not try to remove itwith your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or layit face down, as it could become scratched ordamaged. Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedure to remove theflat tire and install the spare tire.

488

1. Loosen the wheelnuts using thefolding wrench,but do notremove them.

Turn the handle counterclockwise about180 degrees, then flip the handle back to thestarting position. This avoids taking thewrench off the lug nut for each turn.

Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks andyou use an impact wrench to remove the wheelnuts, you could damage the lock nut orwheel lock key. Do not use an impact wrenchto remove the wheel nuts if your vehiclehas wheel locks.

Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehiclewithout positioning it correctly, you coulddamage your vehicle. When raising yourvehicle on a jack, avoid contact with the rearaxle control arms.

Notice: If you position the jack under therocker molding and attempt to raise thevehicle, you could break the molding and/orcause other damage to your vehicle. Alwaysposition the jack so that when the jack head israised, it will fit firmly in the notch locatedinboard from the rocker molding.

489

A. Front LocationB. Rear Location

2. Near each wheel, there is a notch (A and B)in the vehicle’s frame, inboard of the rockermolding. Position the jack and raise thejack head until it fits firmly into the notch inthe vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.Do not raise the vehicle yet.

3. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

490

4. Attach the folding wrench (A) to the jack (B),and turn the wrench clockwise to raise thejack head approximately 3 inches (7.6 cm).

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the foldingwrench clockwise in the jack. Raise thevehicle far enough off the ground so thereis enough room for the compact spare tireto fit under the wheel well.

491

6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after a time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brush later, ifneeded, to get all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

492

8. Install the compactspare tire andput the wheel nutsback on withthe rounded end ofthe nuts towardthe wheel.

Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel isheld against the hub. 9. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding

wheel wrench to the jack and turning thewrench counterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

493

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 518for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specifications on page 518for the wheel nut torque specification.

10. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

11. Do not try to put a wheel cover on thecompact spare tire. It will not fit. Storethe wheel cover securely in the rear of thevehicle until you have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

494

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tirehoist assembly equipped with a secondary latchsystem. It is designed to stop a tire from suddenlyfalling off your vehicle if the cable holding thespare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch towork, the tire must be stowed with the valvestem pointing down.

Your vehicle uses the underbody tire hoistassembly to store either the compact spare ora flat road tire. See Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools on page 497 for instructions onstoring the spare or flat tire correctly.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the spare.

495

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead ofthe rear bumper. Position the center liftpoint of the jack under the center of thecompact spare tire.

2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raisethe jack until it lifts the secondary latchdevice under the wheel plate.

3. Keep raising the jack until the compact sparetire stops moving upward and is held firmly inplace. This lets you know that the secondarylatch has released.

4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack untilthe compact spare tire is resting on thefolding wrench.

496

5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both handsand pull it out from under the vehicle.

6. Reach under the vehicle and remove thefolding wrench and jack.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare orflat tire using the hoist assembly until it hasbeen repaired or replaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

497

Storing the Flat or Spare Tire

{CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be stored with the valve stem pointingdown. If the spare tire is stored withthe valve stem pointing upwards, itssecondary latch will not work properlyand the spare tire could loosen andsuddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was beingdriven, the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injury and, ofcourse, damage to itself as well. Be surethe underbody-mounted spare tire isstored with its valve stem pointing down.

To store the spare tire, do the following:

1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle withthe valve stem down.

2. Remove the small center cap by tapping theback of the cap with the extension of theshaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Slide the cable retainer through the center ofthe wheel and start to raise the tire.Make sure the retainer is fully seated acrossthe underside of the wheel.

4. When the tire is almost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve is towards the rearof the vehicle.This will help when you check and maintaintire pressure in the spare.

5. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle. Continue turning the foldingwrench until you feel more than two clicks.This indicates that the compact sparetire is secure and the cable is tight. Thespare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.

498

6. Make sure the tire is stored securely.Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) thetire. If the tire moves, use the folding wrenchto tighten the cable.

Storing the Tools

A. StrapB. Bag and ToolsC. Jack

Put back all tools as they were stored in the jackstorage compartment and put the compartmentcover back on.

499

To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the rightof the cover with the slots in the cover opening.Push the cover in place and push down the tabso that it rests in the groove. This securesthe cover in place.

Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheelcovers until a full size tire is put back on thevehicle. When you replace the compact spare witha full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel coversor the center cap. Hand-tighten them overthe wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is madeto perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), soyou can finish your trip and have the full-size tirerepaired or replaced at your convenience.

Of course, it is best to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire willlast longer and be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

500

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they werenot intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your retailer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

501

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

502

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

503

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase glosson your instrument panel. The increase ingloss may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see throughthe windshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 530.

504

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish isto keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. You can get approvedcleaning products from your retailer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 509. Donot use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 505.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your Saturn retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 509.

Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made fora basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

505

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage yourvehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. You can help tokeep the paint finish looking new by keepingyour vehicle in a garage or covered wheneverpossible.

Windshield, Backglass, and WiperBladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with afull-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshieldis clean if beads do not form when you rinse itwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

506

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly Saturn-approved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

507

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your Saturnretailer. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body andpaint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your Saturnretailer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on yourvehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

508

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,Saturn will repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke, and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Description Usage

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Sprayon wipe off.

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one easy step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl, andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather, and carpet.

509

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

510

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 99.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by four internalfuses in the underhood fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the lamps to go on and off, orin some cases to remain off. If this happens,have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected byan internal fuse in the underhood fuse block.If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc.,the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by some electrical problem,be sure to get it fixed.

The rear washer pump is controlled by a relaylocated in the engine compartment, behindthe windshield washer fluid reservoir. The rearwiper motor is protected by a fuse located in theinstrument panel fuse block.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panelprotect the power windows and other poweraccessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protectingthe circuit until the problem is fixed.

511

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that hasthe same amperage or use one of the spare fusesin the underhood fuse block. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout, like the radio or cigarette lighter, and useits fuse if it is the right amperage. Replace itas soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, theinstrument panel fuse block and the underhoodfuse block.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located atthe right end of the instrument panel, on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle. Open the frontpassegner’s door, and remove the cover, toaccess the fuse block.

Your vehicle may not have all of the fuses listed.

512

Fuses Usage

1 Trunk, Door Locks

2 Electronic Level Control

3 Rear Wiper

4 Radio, DVD Player

5 Interior Lamps

6 OnStar®

7 Keyless Entry Module

8 Cluster, Heating, Ventilation,Air Conditioning

9 Cruise Switch

10 Steering Wheel Illumination

11 Power Mirror

12 Stoplamp, Turn Lamps

13 Heated Seats

14 Blank

15 Electronic Level Control

513

Fuses Usage

16 Heated Mirror

17 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,Back-up Lamps

18 Blank

19 Canister Vent Solenoid

20 Park Lamps

21 Power Sliding Door

22 Blank

23 Blank

24 Left Power Sliding Door

25 Right Power Sliding Door

Relays Usage

26 Blank

27 Blank

28 Park Lamps, Taillamps

29 Retained Accessory Power

30 Rear Defog

PLR Fuse Puller

CircuitBreakers

Usage

31 Power Seats

32 Power Window

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment. For more information on locationsee Engine Compartment Overview on page 422.

514

Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed.

Fuses Usage

1 Right High-Beam

2 Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

3 Diode

BLANK Not Used

515

Fuses Usage

BLANK Not Used

4 Left High-Beam

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

5 Not Used

6 Air Conditioning Clutch

7 Horn

8 Left Low-Beam

9 Powertrain Control Module,Electronic Throttle Control

10 Not Used

11 Transmission Solenoid

12 Right Low-Beam

13 Anti-lock Brake System

14 Powertrain Control Module Ignition

Fuses Usage

15 Electronic Ignition

16 Fuel Injector

17 Climate Control, RPA,Cruise Control

18 Electronic Throttle Control

19 Engine Sensor, Evaporator

20 Airbag

21 Not Used

22 Not Used

23 Auxiliary Power

24 Front Windshield Washer

25 AC/DC Inverter

26 Rear Blower

27 Front Blower

28 Front Windshield Wiper

516

J-Case Fuses Usage

PLR Fuse Puller

29 Fan 1

30 Starter Solenoid

31 Anti-lock Brake System Motor

32 Blank

33 Fan 2

34 Front Blower High

35 Battery Main 3

36 Rear Defogger

37 Battery Main 2

38 Spare

Relays Usage

RUN RLY Starter

LO BEAM Low-Beam

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

HORN Horn

AC/CLTCH Air Conditioning Clutch

HI BEAM High-Beam

PWR/TRN Powertrain

WPR2 Wiper 2

WPR1 Wiper 1

FAN 1 Fan 1

CRNK Crank

IGN MAIN Ignition Main

FAN2 Fan 2

FAN3 Fan 3

BLANK Not Used

517

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 530 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant charge

amount, see the refrigerant caution label located underthe hood. See your dealer for more information.

Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and Replacement 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Cooling System

3.9L Engine Front Climate Controls Only 10.77 qt 10.2 L

3.9L Engine with Rear Climate Controls 12.11 qt 11.55 L

Engine Oil with Filter 4.0 qt 3.8 L

Fuel Capacity 25.1 gal 95.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3.9L V6 1 Automatic 0.040 in (1.1 mm)

518

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 520Introduction ............................................... 520Maintenance Requirements ........................ 520Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 520Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 520Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 522Additional Required Services ..................... 524Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 525Owner Checks and Services ..................... 526

At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 527At Least Once a Month ............................. 527At Least Once a Year ............................... 528Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 530Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 532Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 533Maintenance Record .................................. 534

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

519

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at Saturn want to help you keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the timein very hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

520

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourSaturn retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 414.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 522 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 524and Maintenance Footnotes on page 525 forfurther information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your retailer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 413.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour Saturn retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your Saturn retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that Saturn-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine Saturn parts.

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 553.

521

Owner Checks and Services on page 526 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricantsto use are listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 530 and Normal MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 532. When yourvehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. Allparts should be replaced and all necessary repairsdone before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.We recommend the use of genuine Saturn parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message comeson, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your Saturnretailer has Saturn-trained service technicianswho will perform this work using genuine Saturnparts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 426 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever themessage comes on 10 months or more sincethe last service or if the message has not comeon at all for one year.

522

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 423. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 426. An Emission Control Service. • •

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 428. See footnote (g). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 472 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 527.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

523

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 428. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (m).

•

524

Maintenance Footnotes# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, and the underbody contactpoints and linkage.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. Checkparking brake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspectpower steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latches, pivots, springanchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,rear folding seats, liftgate hinges, fuel doorhinge, power sliding door cable, and sliding doortrack(s). More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

525

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. SeeEngine Coolant on page 432 for what touse. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components that havehigh effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricateaccelerator or cruise control cables.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked.Add fluid if needed.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailercan assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 530.

526

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 423 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 432 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 469. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 484.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 472.

527

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 147.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your Saturn retailerfor service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 147.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P),contact your Saturn retailer for service.

528

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try toturn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You or otherscould be injured and property could bedamaged. Make sure there is room in frontof your vehicle in case it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

529

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 423.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 432.


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

Power Steering Fluid(Saturn Part No. 21007583 orGM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

530


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges, RearFolding Seat,

Fuel DoorHinge, Liftgate

Hinges andPower SlidingDoor Cable

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).


Sliding DoorTrack

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

531

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourSaturn retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15222510 —

Engine Oil Filter 89017342 PF61

Spark Plugs 12591131 41-100

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side — 22.0 inches (55.0 cm) 12335833 —

Passenger’s Side — 24.0 inches (60.0 cm) 12335834 —

Rear — 16.0 inches (40.0 cm) 15192147 —

532

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.9L V6 Engine

533

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 520.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 526 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

534

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



535

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



536

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 538Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 538Online Owner Center ................................. 541Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 542Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 542GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 543Roadside Assistance Program ................... 543Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 547Collision Damage Repair ........................... 548

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 552Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 552Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 552Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ............ 552Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 553

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

537

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your retailer and to Saturn. Together we arecommitted to providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during and after thepurchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.Normally, any concerns with the sales transactionor the operation of your vehicle will be resolvedby your retailer’s sales or service departments.If, for any reason, your ownership experience fallsbelow your expectations, we suggest you takethe following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail CustomerAssistance Liaison. Any member of the retailmanagement team has the authority and the desireto resolve your concerns. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additionalassistance, in the U.S., contact the SaturnCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact theSaturn Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter team member will handle your call andassist in providing product and warrantyinformation, the nearest retailer location, roadsideassistance, brochures, literature and discuss anyconcerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number. This 17-digitnumber can be found on the vehicle registrationor title, on the upper driver’s side corner of thedash, or on your roadside assistance key card.

• The name of your selling and servicing retailfacility.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

538

When contacting Saturn, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and itsretailers are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, Saturn and its retailers offer the additionalassistance of a neutral party through our voluntaryparticipation in a mediation/arbitration programcalled BBB Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program isavailable at no cost to you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program is free of chargeand your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision givenin your case, you may reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program byusing the toll-free telephone number or by writingthem at the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. SaturnCorporation reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

539

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration ProgramIn the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entiredispute settlement process, from the time you fileyour complaint to the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, oryou may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

540

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturnownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

541

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)equipment in its Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer whohas access to a TDD or to a conventionalText Telephone (TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users inCanada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesSaturn encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a customer wishes to writeto Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

542

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for your vehicle suchas hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Center at1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call the SaturnCustomer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada maycall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S. call1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).

For vehicles purchased in Canada call1-800-268-6800.

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle, youare automatically enrolled in the Saturn RoadsideAssistance Program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

543

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period andin Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel maybe restricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.

If you vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized retailer. In theU.S., replacement keys made at the customer’sexpense will be delivered within 10 miles.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailerfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance provided when the vehicle is miredin sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetime, installation of that tire, in good condition,will be covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be coveredat no charge.

544

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),and (C) alternate ground transportation

(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times whenRoadside Assistance cannot provide timelyassistance, your advisor may authorize you tosecure local emergency road service, and youwill be reimbursed up to $100 upon submissionof the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty forU.S. customers, and the duration of the BaseWarranty Coverage for Canadian customers of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any costfor parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are theresponsibility of the driver.

545

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representatives:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember we are onlya phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000 ; text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Saturn and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains or other traction devices.

546

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information aboutthe condition of the vehicle and how it wasoperated, such as data related to engine speed,brake application, throttle position, vehiclespeed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision.

If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,steering performance, including yaw rate, steeringwheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is alsorecorded. This information has been usedto improve vehicle crash performance and maybe used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with the consent ofthe lessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

547

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can readthe information if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement ormanual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts canhelp maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.

548

A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not covered by yourGM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any relatedfailures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

549

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it bya police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 543 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.

550

In some states/provinces with “no fault”insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.This is especially true if there are no injuriesand both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a Saturnretailer or a private collision repair facility tofix the damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facility

that any required replacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

551

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your retailer or SaturnCorporation.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us.

U.S. customers can call the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

552

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.Or, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsA variety of publications are available to you.Saturn service manuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases, specialized toolsand equipment are necessary to completecertain repairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who either have the training,or wish to gain a greater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications information or to orderpublications in the United States, call toll free1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals are availableby calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtain product bulletins andas described below is applicable only in the fiftyU.S. states and the District of Columbia, and onlyfor cars and light trucks with a Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds(4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins arealso at your participating Saturn retailer. You canask to see them.

In Canada, information relating to product servicebulletins can be obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

553

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailers useful servicebulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitorsproduct performance in the field. We then preparebulletins for servicing our products better. Youcan get these bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertainto the proper use and care of your vehicle.Some describe costly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done on time withthe latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair anew or unexpected condition. Others describe aquicker way to fix your vehicle. They can helpa technician service your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a smallnumber of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or aqualified technician may have to determineif a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn Publicationsat 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order online.

554

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 412Accessory Inflator ........................................ 480Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 203Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ..................................................... 100Additives, Fuel ............................................ 415Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 511Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 428Air Conditioning .................................. 205, 209Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 224Readiness Light ....................................... 223

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 547

Airbag System ............................................... 83Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 100How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 91Passenger Sensing System ....................... 93Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 99What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 91What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 92

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 89Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 86

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 355Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 356Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 363Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 227Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 507Care of Safety Belts ................................ 504Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 508Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 505Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 501Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 502Finish Care .............................................. 505Finish Damage ......................................... 508Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 504Leather .................................................... 503Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 508Tires ........................................................ 507Underbody Maintenance ........................... 508Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 509

555

Appearance Care (cont.)Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 505Weatherstrips ........................................... 504Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 506Audio System(s) .......................................... 270

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 353Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 355Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 355Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 356Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 355Mobile Digital Media System .................... 330Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 294Radio with CD ......................................... 272Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................... 325, 328Setting the Time ...................................... 272Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 352Understanding Radio Reception ............... 354XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 356

Automatic Door Lock ................................... 117Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 430Operation ................................................. 143

BBattery ........................................................ 449

Electric Power Management ..................... 198Run-Down Protection ............................... 199

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 382Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 363Emergencies ............................................ 365Parking .................................................... 147System Warning Light .............................. 226

Brakes ........................................................ 445Braking ....................................................... 362Braking in Emergencies ............................... 365Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 138Bucket Seats, Rear ....................................... 14Bulb Replacement ....................................... 455

Front Turn Signal, Parking and DaytimeRunning Lamps .................................... 457

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 455License Plate Lamps ................................ 459Replacement Bulbs .................................. 460Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 458Buying New Tires ........................................ 474

556

CCalibration ................................................... 240California Fuel ............................................. 415California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 413Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 518Captain Chairs, Rear ..................................... 22Carbon Monoxide .............. 128, 151, 386, 398Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 504Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 355Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 355

Cargo Lamp ................................................ 198CD, MP3 ..................................................... 287Chains, Tire ................................................. 480Charging System Light ................................ 226Check

Engine Light ............................................ 229Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 420Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 508Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 63Infants and Young Children ........................ 59Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 69

Child Restraints (cont.)Older Children ........................................... 56Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 77Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 79Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 67

Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 356Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 205Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 507Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 505Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 502Finish Care .............................................. 505Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 501Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 504Leather .................................................... 503Tires ........................................................ 507Underbody Maintenance ........................... 508Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 505Weatherstrips ........................................... 504Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 506

557

Climate Control System ............................... 205Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 217Dual ......................................................... 209Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 212Rear ............................................... 212, 215

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 548Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 52Compact Spare Tire .................................... 500Compass ..................................................... 240Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 133Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 362Convenience Net ......................................... 173Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 228Heater, Engine ......................................... 141

Cooling System ........................................... 438Cruise Control ............................................. 188Cruise Control Light .................................... 233Cupholder(s) ................................................ 167Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 542

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 542Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 538GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 543Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn .......... 552

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 552Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 552Roadside Assistance Program .................. 543Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 553

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 193Defensive Driving ........................................ 358Delayed Lighting .......................................... 196Delayed Locking .......................................... 116DIC Compass .............................................. 240Disc, MP3 ................................................... 287Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 413Dome Lamp ................................................ 196Door

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 117Delayed Locking ...................................... 116Dual Sliding Doors ................................... 118Locks ....................................................... 114

558

Door (cont.)Power Door Locks ................................... 116Power Sliding Door .................................. 121Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 118

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 38

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 234DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 235DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 261DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 241

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 375City .......................................................... 380Defensive ................................................. 358Drunken ................................................... 359Freeway ................................................... 381Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 384In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 376Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 391Winter ...................................................... 386

Dual Climate Control System ....................... 209DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ..... 294, 309

EElectric Power Management ........................ 198Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 511Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 512Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 511Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 512Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 511Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 514Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 511

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 428Battery ..................................................... 449Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 229Coolant .................................................... 432Coolant Heater ......................................... 141Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 228Drive Belt Routing .................................... 533Engine Compartment Overview ................ 422Exhaust ................................................... 151Oil ........................................................... 423

559

Engine (cont.)Oil Life System ........................................ 426Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 437Overheating ............................................. 435Starting .................................................... 140

Entry Lighting .............................................. 196Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 547Exit Lighting ................................................ 197Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 55Exterior Lamps ............................................ 192

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 428Finish Damage ............................................ 508Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 355Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 182Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 185Flat Tire ...................................................... 483Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 484Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 497

FluidAutomatic Transaxle ................................. 430Power Steering ........................................ 443Windshield Washer .................................. 444

Folding Tray ................................................ 170Front Console Storage Area ........................ 170Front Reading Lamps .................................. 197Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime

Running Lamps ........................................ 457Fuel ............................................................ 414

Additives .................................................. 415California Fuel .......................................... 415Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 419Filling Your Tank ...................................... 417Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 416Gage ....................................................... 233Gasoline Octane ...................................... 414Gasoline Specifications ............................ 414Low Warning Light ................................... 234

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 512Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 512Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 514Windshield Wiper ..................................... 511

560

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 228Fuel ......................................................... 233Speedometer ........................................... 221Tachometer .............................................. 221

Garage Door Opener .......................... 156, 157Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 414Specifications ........................................... 414

Glove Box ................................................... 167GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 543

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 182Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 511Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 455Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ................................ 193

Headlamps (cont.)Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 185Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 455Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .......... 456High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 185On Reminder ........................................... 193Wiper Activated ........................................ 193

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ............. 456Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ................................................ 205, 209Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ....................... 174Highbeam On Light ..................................... 233High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 471Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 383Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 384Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 420Release ................................................... 421

Horn ............................................................ 182How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 38

561

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 138Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 59Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 469Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 180Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 195Cluster ..................................................... 220

Interior Lamps Control ................................. 195

JJump Starting .............................................. 450

KKeyless Entry System ................................. 106Keys ........................................................... 105

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 463Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 199Cargo ...................................................... 198Dome ....................................................... 196Electric Power Management ..................... 198Exterior .................................................... 192Front Reading .......................................... 197Interior Control ......................................... 195Rear Reading .......................................... 197

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 69

Level Control ............................................... 398License Plate Lamps ................................... 459Liftgate ........................................................ 128Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 223Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 227Brake System Warning ............................. 226Charging System ..................................... 226Cruise Control .......................................... 233Highbeam On .......................................... 233

562

Light (cont.)Low Fuel Warning .................................... 234Malfunction Indicator ................................ 229Oil Pressure ............................................. 232Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 224Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 222Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 222Security ................................................... 232TCS Warning Light .................................. 228Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ... 228

LightingDelayed ................................................... 196Entry ........................................................ 196Exit .......................................................... 197

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 391Lockout Protection ....................................... 118Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 117Delayed Locking ...................................... 116Door ........................................................ 114Lockout Protection ................................... 118Power Door ............................................. 116Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 118

Loss of Control ........................................... 374Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 234Luggage Carrier .......................................... 172

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 524At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 527At Least Once a Month ............................ 527At Least Once a Year .............................. 528Introduction .............................................. 520Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 525Maintenance Record ................................ 534Maintenance Requirements ...................... 520Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 532Owner Checks and Services .................... 526Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 530Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 522Using ....................................................... 520Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 520

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 229Manual Rear Quarter Windows .................... 131Manual Seats .................................................. 9Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 241

563

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ........................... 153Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 154Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 154Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 153

Mobile Digital Media System ....................... 330MP3 ............................................................ 287MyGMLink.com ............................................ 541

NNavigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................... 294New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 138Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 532

OOdometer .................................................... 221Odometer, Trip ............................................ 221Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 372Oil

Engine ..................................................... 423Pressure Light .......................................... 232

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 426Older Children, Restraints ............................. 56Online Owner Center ................................... 541OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 154Other Warning Devices ................................ 182Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 212Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 203Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 154Heated Mirrors ......................................... 154Power Mirrors .......................................... 153

Overhead Console .............................. 168, 170Overhead Console Switchbank .................... 200Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ....................................... 437Owner Checks and Services ....................... 526Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

564

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 508Park Aid ...................................................... 200Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 148Shifting Out of ......................................... 149

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 200Brake ....................................................... 147Over Things That Burn ............................ 150

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 224Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 217Passenger Sensing System ........................... 93Passing ....................................................... 372PASS-Key® III ............................................. 135PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 136Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 203Door Locks .............................................. 116Electrical System ..................................... 511Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 204Rear Quarter Windows ............................. 132Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 139Seat .......................................................... 10

Power (cont.)Sliding Door ............................................. 121Steering Fluid .......................................... 443Windows .................................................. 131

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 55Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 118

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 37

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 435Radios ........................................................ 270

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 355Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 355Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 294Radio with CD ......................................... 272Rear Seat Audio ............................. 325, 328Setting the Time ...................................... 272Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 352Understanding Reception ......................... 354

Rear Climate Control System ............. 212, 215

565

Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 197Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 52Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 325, 328Rear Seat Entertainment System ........ 294, 309Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 14Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 49Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 187Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 153Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 11Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 530Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 396Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 106Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ... 107Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 488Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 485Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 460Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 552Saturn ...................................................... 552United States Government ....................... 552

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ............... 101Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................ 102Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 139

Right Front Passenger Position,Safety Belts ............................................... 48

RoadsideAssistance Program ................................. 543

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 391Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 533Running the Engine While Parked ............... 152

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 222Pretensioners ............................................. 55Reminder Light ........................................ 222

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 504Driver Position ........................................... 38How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 38Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 37Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 52Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 49Right Front Passenger Position .................. 48Safety Belt Extender .................................. 55Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 48

566

Safety Belts (cont.)Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 32Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 47

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 522Seats

Bucket Seats, Rear .................................... 14Captain Chairs ........................................... 22Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual ........................................................ 9Power Seats .............................................. 10Rear Seat Operation .................................. 14Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 11Third Row Seat ......................................... 27

Second Row Center Console ...................... 171Secondary Latch System ............................. 495Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ..................................... 77Right Front Seat Position ........................... 79

Security Light .............................................. 232Service ........................................................ 412

Accessories and Modifications .................. 412Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 414California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 413

Service (cont.)Doing Your Own Work ............................. 413Engine Soon Light ................................... 229Publications Ordering Information ............. 553

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 99Setting the Time .......................................... 272Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 508Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 148Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 149Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 47Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 184Sliding Door, Power ..................................... 121Sliding Doors, Dual ..................................... 118Spare Tire

Accessory Inflator ..................................... 480Compact .................................................. 500Installing .................................................. 488Removing ................................................ 485Storing ..................................................... 497

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 518Speedometer ............................................... 221StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 367Starting Your Engine ................................... 140Steering ...................................................... 369Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 353Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 182

567

Storage Areas ............................................. 167Convenience Net ..................................... 173Cupholder(s) ............................................ 167Floor Console Storage Area ..................... 170Folding Tray ............................................. 170Glove Box ................................................ 167Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ................... 174Luggage Carrier ....................................... 172Overhead Console .......................... 168, 170Second Row Center Console ................... 171

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 390Sun Visors .................................................. 132Switchbanks

Overhead Console ................................... 200

TTachometer ................................................. 221Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 458

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 228Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 352Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 133

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 133PASS-Key® III .......................................... 135PASS-Key® III Operation .......................... 136

Third Row Seat ............................................. 27Tilt Wheel .................................................... 182Tires ........................................................... 462

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 507Buying New Tires ..................................... 474Chains ..................................................... 480Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 484Cleaning .................................................. 507Compact Spare Tire ................................. 500Different Size ........................................... 476High-Speed Operation .............................. 471If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 483Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 469Inflator, Accessory .................................... 480Inspection and Rotation ............................ 472Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 488Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 488Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 485Secondary Latch System ......................... 495Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 497Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 463Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 466Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 477Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 478Wheel Replacement ................................. 478When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 473

568

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 396Towing a Trailer ....................................... 398Your Vehicle ............................................. 396

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 365Control System Warning Light .................. 228StabiliTrak® System ................................. 367

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 430

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 143Trip Odometer ............................................. 221Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 184Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 183

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 200Understanding Radio Reception ................... 354Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 477Universal Home Remote System ........ 156, 157

Operation ........................................ 158, 163

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 362Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 391Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 547

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 510Service Parts Identification Label .............. 510

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 261

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 212Visors .......................................................... 132

569

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 219Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 241Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 182Other Warning Devices ............................ 182Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 478Different Size ........................................... 476Replacement ............................................ 478

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 67Windows ..................................................... 130

Manual Rear Quarter ............................... 131Power ...................................................... 131Power Rear Quarter ................................. 132

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ... 506Washer .................................................... 186Washer Fluid ........................................... 444Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 460Wiper Fuses ............................................ 511Wipers ..................................................... 185

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 187Winter Driving ............................................. 386Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 193

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 293XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 356

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 520

570

2007 Saturn RELAY Owner Manual M - Chevrolet · How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Saturn RELAY Owner Manual M - Chevrolet · How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner...